Ujf3042 PDF

Service Documents
UJF-3042 / UJF-3042FX
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D500552-23
Service Documents > Maintenance Manual Change Tracking
Maintenance Manual Change Tracking
Date 2013.07.18 Manual Ver. 2.3 Remark

Index Status Rev. Changes
1.3.1 Added 2.0 New item was added.
5.1.9 Modified 2.1 Explanation was modified.
6.3.9 Added 2.0 Item was added.
6.3.10 Added 2.0 Item was added.

4.2.20 Added 1.0 NACHINE NAME is added.
8.3.1-P3 Modified 2.1 NACHINE NAME is added.

4.2.19 Added Wash tube is added.

all Changed 2.0 Including UJF-3042FX, it was changed to 2 models common document
1.1.5 Modified 2.0 Explanation was modified.
1.2.1 Modified 2.0 Process sequence was modified.
1.2.2 Changed 2.0 "Wiper Exchange” -> “Wiper Cleaning”
2.3.5 Modified 2.0 “List of Connectors” was modified.
4.2.16 Modified 2.0 List was modified.
4.2.19 Deleted --- An item was deleted.(Nozzle Recovery)
4.3.1 Changed 2.0 Procedures was changed.
5.1.4 Changed 2.0 Parameter was added.
7.1.2 Changed 2.0 “ERROR 605” was changed.
7.1.3 Changed 2.0 “REPLACE WIPER” -> “CLEANING WIPER”
8.3.1 Changed 2.0 Flow was changed.
8.3.2
8.3.3

3.1.3 Modified 1.1 Process was added.
4.2.3 Modified 1.1 Process was Modified.
6.3.6 Added 1.1 “IMPORTANT“ was added.
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. Maintenance Manual Change Tracking P.1


7.1.2 Added 1.2 Dtail of the “ERROR 12e” was added.
P1,9,10
7.1.2 Added 1.2 “ERROR 70a” was added.
P8
7.2.2 Added 1.1(P1) “Outline” was Modified.
1.0(P2~) “Countermeasure” was Modified.
8.2.1 Modified 1.2 Operation Flow was changed. (Because F/W was revised)

~
1.1.5
~
1.2.10
2.1.1 Modified 1.1 Block diagram was changed.
(Because the specifications of the LED - UV device were changed.)
~
2.3.11
~
5.3.2
4.2.1 Modified 1.1 Function was added.
Head Back/Forth Adjusting Pattern was added.
4.2.3 Modified 1.1 Adjustment standard was changed.
4.2.15 Modified 1.1 Adjustment standard was changed.
~
5.1.15
~
6.29
6.3.1 Modified 1.1 Process was changed.
~
6.5.5
6.7.1 Modified 1.1 Process was changed.(Because the specifications of the LED - UV device were changed.)


7.1.2 Modified 1.1 Error message was added.
7.1.3 Modified 1.1 Warning message was added.
7.1.4 Modified 1.1 SYSTEM HALT was added.
~
7.2.2
~
8.2.5
~
8.3.3

Released New issued

Maintenance Manual > Maintenance Manual Contents
Rev.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2013.07.18 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Maintenance Manual Contents 2.2
1 Operating Principle 3.2 Driving Parts
1.1 Basic Operation 3.2.1 Replacement of Z-Driving Screw

3.2.2 Replacement of Tabel Absorption Fan
1.1.1 Sequence at POWER ON
1.1.2 Sequence at POWER OFF 3.3 Electrical Parts
1.1.3 Work Area Sensor 3.3.1 Replacement of Main PCB
1.1.4 LED-UV UNIT 3.3.2 Replacement of 3042 Slider Relay
1.1.5 600cc Cartridge PCB Assy
3.3.3 Replacement of ID Contact PCB
1.2 Maintenance Function
1.2.1 Carriage out 3.4 Sensors
1.2.2 Wiper Cleaning
3.5 UV UNIT
1.2.3 Wiper Bottle
1.2.4 Waste Ink Tank 3.5.1 Replacement of LEDUV Irradiation
1.2.5 Cartridge Exchange Assy
1.2.6 Filter Check 3.5.2 Replacement of LEDUVx2-DRIVE
1.2.7 NOZZLE WASH PCB Assy
1.2.8 Discharge way washing
1.2.9 CUSTODY WASH
4 Adjustment
1.2.10 HEAD MAINTENANCE
4.1 Operation Matrix
1.3 Ink System
1.3.1 Monitoring of the Amount of 4.2 Adjustment Items
Remaining Ink 4.2.1 PRINT ADJUST
4.2.2 HEAD ADJUST
4.2.3 CAPPING
2 Electrical Parts
4.2.4 ADJUST WIPER
2.1 Block Diagram 4.2.5 HEAD WASH(#ADJUST)
4.2.6 HEAD ID
2.1.1 Internal Connection Diagram
4.2.7 HEAD TEMP
2.2 Operating Description 4.2.8 EXCHANGE LED UV
4.2.9 SERIAL No.
2.3 Circuit Board Specifications 4.2.10 DEALER No.
2.3.1 Power Supply PCB Assy. 4.2.11 ORIGIN ADJUST
2.3.2 Main PCB Assy. 4.2.12 TABLE ADJUST
2.3.3 GP KeyBoard PCB Assy. 4.2.13 SET QUALITY
2.3.4 3042 Station3 PCB Assy. 4.2.14 FEED COMP.2
2.3.5 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy. 4.2.15 ANGLE ADJUST
2.3.6 3042 Pump3 PCB Assy. 4.2.16 DEFAULT SET
2.3.7 ID Contact PCB CN032 Assy. 4.2.17 Head Voltage Adjustment
2.3.8 3042 Slider PCB Assy. 4.2.18 Shot Count Reset
2.3.9 Encorder PCB Assy. 4.2.19 Wash Tube
2.3.10 LEDUVx2-DRIVE PCB Assy. 4.2.20 MACHINE NAME(UJF-3042FX)
2.3.11 Water cool LED_1inch-UVLED PCB
Assy. 4.3 Mechanical Adjustment
4.3.1 Adjustment of theTable Flatness
4.3.2 Carriage height Adjustment
3 Workflow 4.3.3 Carriage Front/Rear Tilt Adjustment
4.3.4 LED-UV Unit Height Adjustment
3.1 Ink Related Parts 4.3.5 Work Area Sensor Height Adjustment
3.1.1 Replacement of Head Unit
3.1.2 Replacement of Dumper
3.1.3 Replacement of Pump Head 5 Test
3.1.4 Replacement of Cartridge Guide
Assy. 5.1 Test Items
3.1.5 Replacement of Cartridge Coupling 5.1.1 CHECK PATTERN
Assy. 5.1.2 AGEING
5.1.3 SENSOR TEST
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. Maintenance Manual Contents R.2.2 P.1

Maintenance Manual > Maintenance Manual Contents
Rev.
Maintenance Manual Contents 2.2
5.1.4 PARAM. DRAW 6.5 Sensors

5.1.5 MEMORY CHECK 6.5.1 X origin sensor
5.1.6 Key Board Test 6.5.2 Z origin sensor
5.1.7 LCD Test 6.5.3 Work area sensor
5.1.8 Temperature Check 6.5.4 Cover sensor
5.1.9 UV LEVEL Check 6.5.5 Table Cover sensor
5.1.10 INK IC Check
5.1.11 INK TEST 6.6 Other Electrical Parts
5.1.12 ENCORDER Check
6.7 UV Parts
5.1.13 EVENT LOG
5.1.14 Message Check 6.7.1 LED UV UNIT
5.1.15 HW Test 6.7.2 UV Cooling Unit
6.7.3 Cooling Water Pump
5.2 Other Test 6.7.4 Radiator Fan Assy.
5.2.1 Ink route leak confirmation procedure
6.8 Greasing
6 Disassembly and Reassembly

7 Troubleshooting
6.1 Covers
7.1 Details on Errors and Malfunctions
6.1.1 Cover Layout
6.1.2 Key Panel Assy 7.1.1 Concerning Errors and Malfunctions
6.1.3 “Tube_FFC Holder” Stick the 7.1.2 List of Error Messages
Protection tape 7.1.3 List of Warning Messages
7.1.4 List of SYSTEM HALT
6.2 Ink-related Parts 7.1.5 Troubles Without Messages
6.2.1 Head Assy Displayed
6.2.2 Dumper 7.2 Detailed Methods of Coping with the
6.2.3 Pump Head Malfunctions
6.2.4 Station Assy.
6.2.5 Wipe Suction Pump Assy. 7.2.1 Cannot start for “SYSTEM HALT(1)
11c:SLDR PCB H”
6.2.6 Cartridge Guide Assy.
7.2.2 Discharging defect cannot be
6.2.7 Cartridge Coupling Assy.
improved by cleaning.
6.2.8 Capping
6.2.9 Wiper unit Assy(Belt, Sensor)
6.3 Driving Parts 8 Operation Flow
6.3.1 X-axis Motor Assy 8.1 Basic Operation
6.3.2 Y-axis Motor
8.1.1 Start
6.3.3 Table
6.3.4 Z-Driving Screw 8.2 Print Mode
6.3.5 Slider Relay Cooling Fan Assy 8.2.1 LOCAL / REMOTE
6.3.6 Mist Suction Fan Assy 8.2.2 FUNCTION
6.3.7 Tabel Absorption Fan 8.2.3 SETUP
6.3.8 Linear Encorder Scale 8.2.4 MAINTENANCE
6.3.9 X Gear Box 8.2.5 MACHINE SETUP
6.3.10 Motor Coupling
8.3 Service Mode
6.4 PCBs
8.3.1 #ADJUST
6.4.1 Power Supply PCB Assy 8.3.2 #TEST
6.4.2 Main PCB 8.3.3 #PARAMETER
6.4.3 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy
6.4.4 3042 Station 3 PCB Assy
6.4.5 Slider PCB
6.4.6 3042 Pump 3 PCB Assy
6.4.7 ID Contact PCB
6.4.8 Keyboard PCB
6.4.9 Linear Encoder PCB
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. Maintenance Manual Contents R.2.2 P.2

Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation
1. Operating Principle
1.1 1.2 1.3
1
Basic Operation Maintenance Function Ink System
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.

Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation > Sequence at POWER ON
Rev.
1.1.1 Sequence at POWER ON 2.0
 Sequence at turning on the power supply

The flow after turning on the power supply is as below:
No. Item Process content

1 CPU, H/W default setting
1
2 S-RAM check Read/ Write check of S-RAM
This is not activated when an error has been detected.
3 F-ROM check Hash check of F-ROM
When a hash error occurs, 7-seg LED on the main PCB lights and “P” is displayed.
4 Voltage check Power Supply voltage check of Main PCB.
2
In the case of the abnormal detection, 7-seg LED on the main PCB lights.
5 FPGA configuration Configuration other than the slider PCB
6 SD-RAM check Read/ Write check of SD-RAM
ERROR112 is displayed and system is shut down when an error has been detected.
7 Version infomation display Turns OFF the power supply for the UV lamp (+35V) by clearing data.
8 Parameter check Parameter initialization at the initial startup after F/W version upgrade
Initializes the parameters below:
3
• MAINTENANCE
• SERVO
• INK2
4
• WAVE1
• WAVE2
• SCAN
In addition, performs check sum in the parameter area, displays ERROR202 (parameter error) and
shuts down the system.
9 Initial operation FPGA configuration of the slider PCB and origin detection operation
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. 1.1.1 R.2.0 P.1

Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation > Sequence at POWER OFF
Rev.
1.1.2 Sequence at POWER OFF 2.0
 Sequence at turning OFF the power supply

The flow until the power supply is turned OFF is as below:

1 UV Power OFF Turns OFF the power supply of the UV lamp unit.
1
2 Moving to local If the status is other than local, changes it to local.
3 Saving parameter Saves the parameters below when the power supply is turned OFF.
• Saving the parameter value
• Backup of the parameter to F-ROM
In addition, performs check sum and displays ERROR817 (save area error) when an error occurs.
2
4 Moving head to capping Moves the head to the capping position if it stays away from that position.
position * Depending on the mode, it may not return to the capping position.
5 Turn Power of SLIDER PCB
OFF
6 Saving event log Saves turning OFF the power supply to the event log.
3
7 Power OFF

Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation > Work Area Sensor
Rev.
1.1.3 Work Area Sensor 2.0
 Outline
This sensor is set to prevent the head from being damaged. It detects the work coming out or warpage etc. on the table
to stop the operation before the head hits that part.
 Figure of constitution
STOP!
Light axis position
Below 0.5mm from the bottom
surface of the head
1
Head
Sensor for receiving light Sensor for floodlighting
Basic head gap: 1.5mm Table

2
 Operating Principle
3
1 The light axis of the obstacle sensor is set below 0.5mm from the bottom surface of the nozzle.
2 When LED light of the sensor (visible light) is shaded by the obstacle, the operation is terminated.
3 Before the printing operation, checks whether there is no obstacle by moving the Y-Bar back and forth with the
head being stored in the station.

Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation > LED-UV UNIT
Rev.
1.1.4 LED-UV UNIT 2.0
 Outline
This UV unit is a lamp using LED and water circulation is adopted for heat release.
 Figure of constitution
LEDUVx2 DRV PCB 3042 UVDRV Control

Assy
Radiator
1
Water Cooling Fan Assy
Float Switch
LEDUV Iirradiation Assy
2
(Water cooled system)
Water cooling Dia-

phragm Assy
Float
(For visual
DRV PCB Cooling Fan
3
check)
(For cooling the Drive PCB) LED-UV UNIT Water Cooling System
 Operation principle of LED-UV unit

The UV unit is equipped with eight LED-UVs, and you can control luminance and ON/OFF individually.
4
The flow while the UV unit operates is as below:

1 Start drawing Turn ON the UV lamp power supply (+35V) and the LEDUVx2 DRV PCB cooling FAN.
5
2 During drawing Controls the amount of light and ON/OFF of each LED-UV, and lighting area, and detects errors during lighting.
When an abnormality has been detected, the error below occurs.
ERROR706 UV UNIT OVER HEAT (The temperature in the UV unit became higher than the specific value.)
ERROR708 UV THERMISTOR BRK (The thermistor (temperature sensor) in the UV unit came down.)
ERROR70a LED UV CURRENT (LEDUV is broken or the detected current is abnormal.)
6
3 Abort of drawing Turn OFF the UV lamp power supply (+35V) by DATA CLEAR.
4 End drawing Turn OFF all LED-UVs after drawing is completed.
Turn OFF the UV lamp power supply (+35V).
 Operation principle of water cooled system
7
This is a system to cool the UV unit.
Controls the amount of cooling water by monitoring the temperature of the thermistor on the UVLED PCB.

1 Waiting status 1. Monitors the temperature of the UVLED PCB.
8
Online state 2. Monitors the temperature of the UVLED PCB and if it becomes 30 degrees and above,
rotates the water cooled pump and the radiator FAN. (You can set three levels of the flow
volume for the water cooled pump depending on the temperature of the UVLED.)
3. Monitors the temperature of the UVLED PCB and if it becomes 30 degrees and below,
stops the water cooled pump and the radiator FAN.
4. When an abnormality has been detected in the water cooled system, the error below occurs.
• ERROR705 WATER LACK (Water in the cooling water buffer tank became less.)

Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation > 600cc Cartridge
Rev.
1.1.5 600cc Cartridge 2.0
 Outline
A 600cc-cartridge can be used for this machine.
It is not necessary to change the mechanism etc. Only you have to do is to insert it into the ink slot as is the case with
the normal cartridge.
In addition, as the control is changed to the dedicated one for 600cc-cartridge, the recognition method for the remain-
ing amount of ink is also changed. Therefore, the operation will be changed. Here, the basic principle of controlling
the remaining amount of ink is mainly explained. (For the details of operation, refer to the user’s manual as it is a
user’s level thing.)
1
 Operating Principle
 Setting cartridge
1 Actually measure the weight of an empty cartridge (without the IC chip/ink pack).
2 Set up the 600cc-cartridge.
Put the ink pack in the empty cartridge and attach the IC chip.
2
3 Set the 600cc-cartridge in the ink slot.
4 The main body recognizes that it is a “600cc-cartridge” from the IC chip.
3
5 Enter the “CASE WEIGHT”, the empty cartridge weight measured in the Step 1 above.
The LCD is changed to prompt you to enter the “CASE WEIGHT” for the slot on which the 600cc-car-
tridge was set.
This will be the value to calculate the remaining amount of ink from total weight of the cartridges set sub-
sequently.
4
 Recognizing remaining amount of ink
* Operable "After ink filling", "After Ink level Low occurs", "After Ink level end occurs" and
"When weight has not been entered".
1 Perform “CART WEIGHT ”.
2 Pull the 600cc-cartridge from the slot and actually measure total weight of the 600cc-cartridge.
5
3 Enter the actually measured value of the Step 2) above in the “WEIGHT”. (*1)
4 The amount of consumption by normal printing, cleaning, etc. is counted in the F/W depending on the number
of shots and the rotating number of pumps, and they are taken from the “WEIGHT” of the Step 3) above.
 Judgment of ink near end or ink end
1 If the subtracted value of the amount of ink consumption calculated by the F/W described above becomes
6
“60cc” and below, the status of the cartridge is in the “Ink Level Low” and it is recognized as an unusable car-
tridge once. You cannot perform printing.
2 Pull the relevant cartridge out, measure total weight of the cartridge and enter the actual measured value. (*1)
3 If the value subtracted "CASE WEIGHT" initially entered from the actual measured value is 30cc and above,
you can use it again.
7
-- If the value is between 25cc and 30cc, you can use it again, however, it is recognized as "Ink near end" and
you cannot perform cleaning nor ink filling operation.
-- If the value is 25cc and below, it is recognized as "Ink Level end" and you cannot use it.
4 When the remaining amount of ink count inside becomes 30cc and below, it is recognized as "Ink near end"
and you cannot perform cleaning nor ink filling operation.
8
5 When the remaining amount of ink count inside becomes 25cc and below, it is recognized as "Ink Level end". The
cartridge becomes unusable and you cannot perform printing operation.
6 Actually measure the cartridge and enter the value in the same way as the Step 2) above. (*1)
7 If the value by subtracting “CASE WEIGHT”and entered early is 25cc and above, it is recognized as “Ink
near end”and it will become usable again (printing is only available).
If it is 25cc and below, it becomes “Ink Level end” and it will be an unusable cartridge.
(*1): The condition for entering the actually measured value is to pull the cartridge. (Because it shall be measured
actually.)

Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function
1.1 1.2 1.3
1

Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > Carriage out
Rev.
1.2.1 Carriage out 2.0
 LCD display
MAINTENANCE STATION STATION STATION

STATION <ENT> MENT :CARRIAGE PLEASE WAIT COMPLETED <ENT>
 Process sequence
1
STEP. Processing Description
1 Start 1. Moves the table downward to the lowest position.
2. The Y bar comes to the front.
3.
4.
Performs cap OFF and moves the head to the maintenance position.
The wiper comes to the front. 2
2 Performing maintenance 1. The wiper pump operates periodically while maintenance is being
performed.
2. Message of maintenance is completed is displayed. Terminate with the
3
[ENTER].
3 End 1. The wiper returns to the wiper origin position (aftermost).
2. The head caps ON.
3. If the warning of cap cleaning is displayed, clear it.
4. Clear the counter for the warning of cap cleaning.
4
For other than the “service mode”, to prevent dryness of the nozzle surface and inside the cap, the warning sound
beeps at intervals of 30 seconds during carriage out.

Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > Wiper Cleaning
Rev.
1.2.2 Wiper Cleaning 2.0
 Indication on LCD
MAINTENANCE STATION STATION

STATION <ENT> MENT :WIPER CLEANING COMPLETED <ENT>
 Processing sequence
1
1 Start 1. The Y bar comes to the front.
2. Performs cap OFF and moves the head to the maintenance position.
2 Performing maintenance
3. The wiper comes to the front.
1. The wiper pump operates periodically while maintenance is being
2
performed.
[ENTER].
3
3. If the warning of Wiper Cleaning is displayed, clear it.
4. Clear the counter for the warning of Wiper Cleaning
4

Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > Wiper Bottle
Rev.
1.2.3 Wiper Bottle 2.0

STATION <ENT> MENT :WIPER BOTTLE COMPLETED <ENT>
1
2
2 Performing maintenance 1. There is no operation of the machine while maintenance is being
performed.
[ENTER].
3 End 1. If the warning of Wiper Bottle is displayed, clear it.
2. Clear the counter for the warning of Wiper Bottle.

Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > Waste Ink Tank
Rev.
1.2.4 Waste Ink Tank 2.0

STATION <ENT> MENT :WASTE TANK COMPLETED <ENT>
1
2
performed.
[ENTER].
3 End 1. If the warning of Waste Ink Tank is displayed, clear it.
2. Clear the counter for the warning of Waste Ink Tank.

Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > Cartridge Exchange
Rev.
1.2.5 Cartridge Exchange 2.0

STATION <ENT> MENT :EXCH CARTRIDGE COMPLETED <ENT>
1
2
performed.
[ENTER].
3 End 1. There is no operation at termination.

Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > Filter Check
Rev.
1.2.6 Filter Check 2.0

STATION <ENT> MENT :CHECK FILTER COMPLETED <ENT>
1
performed.
2
[ENTER].
3 End 1. The head caps ON.
3
2. If the warning of Filter Exchange is displayed, clear it.
3. Clear the counter for the warning of Filter Exchange.

Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > NOZZLE WASH
Rev.
1.2.7 NOZZLE WASH 2.0
Indicate 1
MAINTENANCE STATION STATION Fill the liquid.

STATION <ENT> MENT :NOZZLE WASH HEAD [123] COMPLETED <ENT>
Indicate 2 Indicate 3 Indicate 4
1
STATION STATION CLEANING ACTIVE
LEAVING : **min LEAVING hh:mm ***---------------
STEP. Processing Description 2

3
2 Performing maintenance 1. The wiper pump operates periodically while maintenance is being performed.
(Indicate 1) 2. Message of maintenance is completed is displayed. Terminate with the [ENTER].
3 Entering leaving time 1. The wiper returns to the wiper origin position (aftermost).
(Indicate 2) 2. The head caps ON.
3. The Y bar returns to the back.
4. Select the leaving time with the[5] [6] keys.
5. When you press the [ENTER] key, it enters in the waiting mode for the set leaving
time. 4
4 Waiting for leaving time 1. It does not move with cap ON for the set leaving time.
(Indicate 3) 2. After the set leaving time has passed, performs cleaning.
5 Cleaning 1. Performs normal cleaning once.
5
(Indicate 4) 2. By cleaning is terminated, nozzle cleaning is completed.

Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > Discharge way washing
Rev.
1.2.8 Discharge way washing 2.0

STATION <ENT> MENT :DISWAY WASH COMPLETED <ENT>
1
• (Absorbs for 5 seconds and leaves for 10 seconds.)
2
2. Message of maintenance is completed is displayed. Terminate with the [ENTER].
3 End 1. Absorbs for 20 seconds at last and the absorption pump stops.
3

Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > CUSTODY WASH
Rev.
1.2.9 CUSTODY WASH 2.0
Indicate 1 Indicate 2
MAINTENANCE STATION Fill the liquid. STATION
STATION <ENT> MENT :CUSTODY WASH COMPLETED <ENT> LEAVING : **min
Indicate 3 Indicate 4 Indicate 5
1
STATION CLEANING ACTIVE STATION
LEAVING hh:mm ***--------------- COMPLETED <ENT>
STEP. Processing Description 2

3
(Indicate 1) 2. Message of maintenance is completed is displayed. Terminate with the [ENTER].
3 Entering leaving time 1. The wiper returns to the wiper origin position (aftermost).
(Indicate 2) 2. The head caps ON.
3. The Y bar returns to the back.
4. Select the leaving time with the[5] [6] keys.
5. When you press the [ENTER] key, it enters in the waiting mode for the set leaving
time. 4
4 Waiting for leaving time 1. It does not move with cap ON for the set leaving time.
(Indicate 3) 2. After the set leaving time has passed, performs cleaning.
5 Cleaning 1. Performs normal cleaning once.
5
(Indicate 4) 2. By cleaning is terminated, nozzle cleaning is completed.
3. Moves the table downward to the lowest position.
7 Performing maintenance 1. The absorption pump operates periodically during maintenance is being performed.
6
(Indicate 5) • (Absorbs for 5 seconds and leaves for 10 seconds.)
2. Message of maintenance is completed is displayed. Terminate with the [ENTER].
8 End 1. Absorbs for 20 seconds at last and the absorption pump stops.
7

Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > HEAD MAINTENANCE
Rev.
1.2.10 HEAD MAINTENANCE 2.0

STATION <ENT> MENT :HEAD MENT COMPLETED <ENT>
1
1 Start 1. Moves the table downward to the lowest position.
2. The Y bar comes to the front.
3.
4.
Performs cap OFF and moves the head to the maintenance position.
The wiper comes to the front. 2
2 Performing maintenance 1. The wiper pump operates periodically while maintenance is being
performed.
[ENTER].
3

Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Ink System
1.1 1.2 1.3
1

Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Ink System > Monitoring of the Amount of Remaining Ink
Rev.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2013.07.18 Revised F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
1.3.1 Monitoring of the Amount of Remaining Ink 2.0
 Outline
This printer supports both 220cc and 600cc cartridges.
This section describes how to monitor the amount of remaining ink.
 Monitoring the amount of remaining ink in 220cc cartridges
No.
1
Message
(No message)
Contents
 Indicates that the amount of ink remaining in the cartridge is between INK FULL and
1
INK NEAR END.
2 INK NEAR END  Occurs when the near end plate on the cartridge is ejected, and blocks the near end
sensor inside the slot.
 Cleaning and ink filling are not possible, and the head returns to local after each print
job. 2
 INK NEAR END status does not go off once it has been triggered.
3 INK END  Occurs if 20cc is consumed after INK NEAR END.
 Cleaning, ink filling, and printing are not possible. (Remote migration is not possible.)
3
 Monitoring the amount of remaining ink in 600cc cartridges
4
No. Message Contents
1 (No message)  Indicates that the amount of ink remaining in the cartridge is between INK FULL and
30cc.
2 INK NEAR END  Occurs if the amount of ink remaining is 60cc or less.
 Cleaning, ink filling, and printing are not possible.
5
 This status goes off when the cartridge weight is entered.
 However, at 30cc or less INK NEAR END occurs, and at 25cc or less INK LEVEL
END occurs.
3 INK END  Occurs if the amount of ink remaining is 30cc or less.
 Cleaning and ink filling are not possible, and the head returns to local after each print
job.
6
4 INK LEVEL END  Occurs if the amount of ink remaining is 25cc or less.
 Cleaning, ink filling, and printing are not possible.
 This status switches to INK NEAR END when the cartridge weight is entered and the
amount of ink remaining is 25cc or more.
 This status does not go off if the amount of ink remaining is 25cc or less.

Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Block Diagram
2. Electrical Parts
2.1 2.2 2.3
2
Block Diagram Operating Description Circuit Board Specifications

Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Block Diagram > Internal Connection Diagram
Rev.
2.1.1 Internal Connection Diagram 2.0

5 4 3
&$575,'*(3$57
Absence1 CS[1..2]
Presence1 NES[1..2]
1
Absence2 CS[1..2]
D Presence2 NES[1..2]
Absence3 CS[1..2]
Presence3 NES[1..2]
Absence4 CS[1..2]
Presence4 NES[1..2] ,23$57
Absence5 CS[1..2]
2
Presence5 NES[1..2]
E106130 3042 SLIDER RELAY PCB
Absence6 CS[1..2] E300764
FFC100R-30-1700
Presence6 NES[1..2] CN3[1..30]
E300765
1033477 FFC100R-30-1700
Cartridge sensor Assy x6 CN7[1..30]
ID contact PCB CN032Assy1 ID[1..2]
E105363 CN10[1..4] CN8[1..30]
ID contact PCB CN032Assy2 ID[1..2] CN12[1..4] E300766
E105363 FFC100R-30-1700
CN11[1..4] CN5[1..12]
ID contact PCB CN032Assy3
3
ID[1..2]
E105363 CN14[1..4] E106270
SR-SLD cable Assy
ID contact PCB CN032Assy4 ID[1..2] CN15[1..4]
E105363
CN16[1..4]
ID contact PCB CN032Assy5 ID[1..2]
E105363 E106246
ID contact connection cable Assy
ID contact PCB CN032Assy6 ID[1..2] CN19[1..12]
C E105363
E106401
Cover Sensor cable Assy
<027253$57 ISW3 CN[1..3] CN4[1..2]
MICRO SW
4
D3M-01K1-3
E300440 CN CN
P[1..2] P[1..2]
MTR2 POW[1..2] P[1..2] P[1..2] IPPR3_short13 Assy CN[1..3] CN25[1..3]
E106086
Ymotor HLR-02V HLP-02V
ENC[1..4] CN CN
E[1..5] E[1..5]
E[1..5] E[1..5] 3042 SR PWR short Assy CN[1..12] CN1[1..12]
E106272
SMR-05V-B SMP-05V-BC
CN27[1..5]
E106258
Y-MTR connection cable Assy
CN28[1..2]
5
CN29[1..6]
/('89/,48,'&22/(53$57
E300766
COOLING PUMP CN CN E106266 FFC125R-16-1200
PMTR E106349 M[1..2] M[1..2] Liquid cool pump connection cable Assy CN26[1..16]
PMP[1..2] M[1..2] M[1..2] CN20[1..5]
LIQUID COOL DIAPHRAM Assy
SMR-02V-B SMP-02V-BC
COOLING FAN CN CN E106267
FAN5 E106265 M[1..2] M[1..2] Liquid cooling FAN connection cable Assy CN6[1..12]
FAN[1..2] M[1..2] M[1..2] CN22[1..2]
LIQUID COOLING FAN Assy CN2[1..30]
B SMR-02V-B SMP-02V-BC
CN CN CN17[1..6]
FLOAT SENSOR E106346
6
E105378 M[1..2] M[1..2] FLOAT SW connection cable Assy CN24[1..2]
SW[1..2] M[1..2] M[1..2]
FLOAT SW Assy
ZHR-2 ZMR-2
FAN4 E106268 FAN[1..2]
COOLING FAN Assy ;&$%/(*8,'(
0$,1%2;3$57
7
E106243
UJF-3042 MAIN PCB Assy
E300763
FFC100R-30-2300
CN6[1..30]
E300442 PWR
E106269
E106248 MAIN-SR CABLE Assy
CN1[1..3] DC Power Cable Assy CN8[1..12]
CN2[1..10] CN11[1..10]
E300814
CN3[1..3] CN12[1..3] FFC125R-20-0500
CN9[1..20]
CN14[1..4]
8
E106254 CN15[1..10]
AC Single Phase L2 Noise Filter Assy
100 to 240V input
A
50/60Hz E106253
E300427 AC inlet Assy
SW1 CN10[1..10]
AC PLUG Power Cable Assy INLET L1 NF1
ACIN[1..2] L2 CN7[1..16]
L L L ACOUT[1..2] ACIN[1..2]
N N N ACOUT[1..2]
E E E E AJ921002WW3F E
CM11(C-459)
SUP-P5H-E1PR-0(OKAYA)
5 4 3

Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Block Diagram > Internal Connection Diagram
Rev.
2.1.1 Internal Connection Diagram 2.0

3 2 1
6/,'(53$57
E106129 3042 SLIDER PCB
CN7[1..50] CN?[1..50] H1~2 R HEAD1

CN8[1..50] CN?[1..50]
GEN4
CN9[1..50] CN?[1..50] H3~4 R HEAD2
CN10[1..50] CN?[1..50]
GEN4
1
CN11[1..50] CN?[1..50] H5~6 R HEAD3
CN12[1..50] CN?[1..50]
GEN4
D
E106247 Y ORG_L-ENC cable Assy
CN19[1..7] CN[1..3] Y ORG SNS
OJ-6505-N2
CN?[1..4] ENCODER PCB Assy
E103961
E106245 LED pointer Assy
CN17[1..8] CN[1..2] LED POINTER
CN CN
P[1..2] P[1..2]
P[1..2] P[1..2] CN[1..2] FAN3 MIST VACCUM FAN Assy
E106318
2
SMP-02V-BC SMR-02V-B
(109-1003G ABS finger guard)
CN
P[1..2]
P[1..2]
CN2[1..30] SMP-02V-BC
CN4[1..30]
CN6[1..30]
CN1[1..12]
3
<&$%/(*8,'( CN[1..3] CN3[1..3] E106429 LED-UVx2 DRV PCB FAN2 UVDRV cooling FAN Assy
CN15[1..22]
IPPR3_short13 Assy E106488 CN4[1..2] CN[1..2] E106489
E106086 CN18[1..10] CN1[1..8]
(109-149E finger guard)
3042 UVDRV control Assy CN2[1..16] E106487 LED1~4
LED-UV cable Assy
CN5[1..10] CN1[1..10] UVLED PCB
E105982
C
E106487 LED5~8
LED-UV cable Assy
CN6[1..10] CN1[1..10] UVLED PCB
E105982
4
/('89,55$',$7,213$57
E106329 3042 PUMP3 PCB SMTR2

:25.$5($6(1625 Stepper motor
CN10[1..16] CN[1..6]
BEAM Sensor(OUT) BEAM Sensor(IN) E106271 E300513
SNS1 Pump MTR connection Assy
CN?[1..3] CN?[1..2] CN8[1..2] SMTR3
Stepper motor
E106259 CN[1..6]
BEAM SENSOR Assy E300513
SMTR4
Stepper motor
5
CN[1..6]
E300513
SMTR5
Stepper motor
CN[1..6]
CN2[1..16] E300513
E106255
Wiper MTR cableAssy
CN11[1..16] S1
Wiper sns cable Assy
CN[1..3]
E106256
CN5[1..8] B
CN[1..3] E104675
6
E106273 CN CN Diaphram Pump Assy
3042 Diaphram cable Assy P[1..4] P[1..4]
CN9[1..2] P[1..4] P[1..4]
5557-02R 5559-02P
67$7,213$57
CN CN FAN1
3042 Station3 PCB P[1..4] P[1..4]
E106328 E106262 P[1..4] P[1..4] FAN[1..2] E106274
Vacuum FAN Cable Assy
5559-02P 5557-02R VacuumFAN Assy
CN14[1..8]
SMTR1
CN13[1..12]
CN3[1..20] E106263 Z MTR Cable Assy CN[1..6] E300513
CN15[1..12] Stepper motor
CN CN
7
E106264 Z ORG Cable Assy
P[1..4] P[1..4]
P[1..4] P[1..4] CN[1..3] Z ORG SENS1
,6: OJ-6505-N2
5559-02P 5557-02R Micro SW
CN[1..3]
Cover Sensor D3M-01K1-3
cable TB Assy
7$%/(3$57
E106319
E106257 CN CN
X-Motor cable Assy P[1..2] P[1..2] MTR1
P[1..2] P[1..2]
YLP-02V YLR-02V POW[1..2]
Xmotor
E106250 ENC[1..4]
X Org Sensor Cable Assy E300532
E300762
FFC100R-10-1600
.(<%2$5'3$57
E106244 GP KEYBOARD Assy
LS1 E106252
Speaker Assy
CN[1..3] X ORG SENS
OJ-6505-N2
A
8
S36G24-1(TOKYO CONE PAPER MFG)
CN CN CN1[1..10] CN6[1..2]
SPOWSW ;027253$57
M[1..2] M[1..2] CN3[1..4] CN5[1..4] E106251 REMOTE SW Assy
M[1..2] M[1..2] SW[1..4] SUB POW SW
SMP-02V-BC SMR-02V-B ISW1 ACEA32327G
SW[1..2]
Safety SW
E106249 Safety SW Assy A165E-S-01
3 2 1

Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Operating Description
2. Electrical Parts
2.1 2.2 2.3
2

Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications
2. Electrical Parts
2.1 2.2 2.3
2

Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Power Supply PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.1 Power Supply PCB Assy. 2.0
2
 Outline
Board name :Power Supply PCB Assy.
Mounted position :Main Control Unit part
 Main specifications
The power for each control and driving is supplied.

3
 List of Connectors
4
Parts No. Pin Connected to:* Connecting des- Remarks
tination CN
CN1 5 Noise Filter Input AC100–240V, 50/60Hz, 3.5A
CN2 10 Main PCB Assy. CN13 Output DC+35V / 6A, +5V / 3.5A, +3.3V / 3.5A
CN3 3 Main PCB Assy. CN15 Remote signal +5VSB 0.7A
* For the details of connecting destinations, refer to the block dia-
gram.
5
 Fuse Rating
Parts No. Rating Use voltage Remarks

F3 T6.3AH 250V AC100–240V AC input part
 Volume Specification 6
Parts No. Voltage Adjustable range
VR1 +35V +34.08V ~ +35.02V
VR2 +5V +4.98V ~ +5.02V
7
VR3 +3.3V +3.28V ~ +3.32V
 Power supply confirmation point
Confirmation point DC Power Voltage Remarks

Parts No. Pin No.
8
CN2 1Pin, 2Pin +35V
CN2 5Pin, 6Pin +5V
CN2 9Pin, 10Pin +3.3V
CN3 1Pin +5VSB

Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Main PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.2 Main PCB Assy. 2.0
2
 Outline
Board name :UJF-3042 MAIN PCB Assy.
3
Mounted position :Main Control Unit part
UJF-3042 MAIN PCB Assy is the PCB to connect the GP Key Board Assy, 3042 Station 3 PCB Assy, 3042 Slider
Relay PCB Assy and the X Motor with the external IF.
USB Port Supports USB2.

LAN Port
Connection between PCBs
Supports 100BASE-TX.
10-pin FFC connection (GP Key Board connection)
4
(KEY I/F)
Connection between PCBs 20-pin FFC connection (3042 Station 3 PCB connection)
(SERIAL IO I/F)
5
Connection between PCBs 30-pin FFC connection (3042 Slider Relay PCB connection)
(HDC I/F) Twisted pair cable (LAN cable is used.)
Motor connection X Motor, X encorder
6
Parts No. Pin Connected to:* Connecting Remarks
destination CN
CN1 4 Host PC USB2.0 I/F
CN2 12 Not Use UART 2CH
CN3 100 Not Use For Debug
CN4 9 Not Use JTAG I/F(For CPLD writing or FPGA JTAG TEST)
CN5
CN6
80
30
Not Use
3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy CN2
For Additional memory board (Connector is not mounted)
HDC IO 7
CN7 16 X Origen sensor, Relay Connec- OJ-6505-N2, Additional +5V supply to GP Key Board , Short
GP Key Board tor Pin
CN8 12 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy CN6 Main PCB - 3042 Slider Relay PCB Serializer I/F
8
CN9 20 3042 Station3 PCB Assy CN3 20 Pin serial IO
CN10 10 GP Key Board Assy CN1 GP Key Board SERIAL IO
CN11 10 Power Supply PCB Assy CN2 DC Voltage Input
CN12 3 Power Supply PCB Assy CN3 Remote signal
CN13 10 LAN I/F Ethernet (100BASE-TX)
CN14 4 X Motor X Motor driver
CN15 10 X Motor X Motor encorder
gram.

Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Main PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.2 Main PCB Assy. 2.0
 Test point
Parts No. Signal Remarks

TP6-7 GND
TP1-5, TP10, TP11 Debug
 LED Specification
Parts No., Signal Remarks 1

D14 Write check of U15 (CPLD). If it is written, it lights.
D15 Fuse check of F2 and F3. If both fuses blown out, it is turned off.
D16 Fuse check of F1 and F4. If both fuses blown out, it is turned off.
D17 Sensor check of CN7 No. 3 Pin (X-origin sensor)
D18
D19
Sensor check of CN7 No. 4 Pin (Not Use)
Fuse check of F5. If the fuse blown out, it is turned off.
2
D23 Fuse check of F6. If the fuse blown out, it is turned off.
D30 Check of +5VSB backup power supply
 Fuse Specification
3
Parts No., Rate Using Voltage Remark
F1 3.15A AC125V, DC60V +35V CN6
F2 3.15A AC125V, DC60V +35V CN6
F3 6.3A AC125V, DC60V +35V CN8
F4
F5
6.3A
3.15A
AC125V, DC60V
AC125V, DC60V
+35V
+35V
CN8
CN9
4
F6 3.15A AC125V, DC60V +5V CN9, CN10
Confirmation point DC Power Voltage Remarks 5

Parts No. Pin No.
CN11 1Pin +35V-1
CN11 2PIn +35V-2 UV Lamp
6
CN11 5Pin, 6Pin +5V
CN11 9Pin, 10Pin +3.3V
CN12 1Pin +5VB Buck up power supply
U17 1Pin +3.3VB Buck up power supply
U24 1Pin +2.5V
U25 1Pin +1.8V
U26
C227
1Pin
[+] Pin
+1.2V
+12V
7
RA89 8Pin A+5V +5V

Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > GP KeyBoard PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.3 GP KeyBoard PCB Assy. 2.0
1
 Outline
2
Board name :GP KeyBoard PCB Assy.
Mounted position :Operating part
The GP KeyBoard PCB Assy is connected with the UJF-3042 MAIN PCB Assy using 10-pin FFC. It displays
information on the LCD, is operated with keys and informs information with sounds.
Information display
Key Operation
Displays on the LCD.
Operates the machine with keys and enters information.
3
Informs with sounds. Informs information with sounds using the speaker.
Connection between PCBs 10-pin FFC connection (GP keyboard PCB connection)
(KET I/F)
 List of Connectors 4
destination CN
CN1 10 UJF-3042 MAIN PCB Assy CN10
5
CN2 16 LCD
CN3 4 X Origin sensor cable Assy DC+5V PowerSupply
EMG SW(A165E-S-01) Safety Stop SW
Cover sensor cable Assy Table cover sensor
CN4 9 Not Use JTAG I/F(For CPLD writing)
CN5 4 Remote SW Assy Software Power SW
CN6 2 Speaker Assy Speaker for sounds guidance.
* For the details of connecting destinations, refer to the block dia- 6
gram.
 Test point

TP1, TP2
GND
7
Parts No., Signal Remarks
D1 Lights when turning ON the power supply.
D2 Write check of IC3 (CPLD). If it is written, it lights.
D3 Lights when software power switch is OFF.
8
Parts No. Pin No.
IC4 5Pin +5V
IC4 4Pin +3.3V

Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > 3042 Station3 PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.4 3042 Station3 PCB Assy. 2.0
3
 Outline
Board name :3042 Station3 PCB Assy.
Mounted position :Table part
4
This PCB controls the stepping motor driving that moves on the table up and down, the origin sensor of the table
(upper and lower) and the absorption FAN of the table.
Stepping motor control For Table moving, Up/Down.

Z Origin sensor Origin sensor of the table.
Blower control Adsorption FAN control
5
Connection between PCBs 20-pin FFC connection
(SERIAL IO I/F)
6
destination CN
CN1 4 Not Use +35V (Preliminary power supply)
CN2 10 Not Use Connector is not mounted.
CN3 20 UJF-3042 MAIN PCB Assy CN9 20 Pin Serial I/O
CN6
CN7
16
2
Not Use
Not Use
Connector is not mounted.
Connector is not mounted. 7
8
CN11 9 Not Use JTAG I/F(CPLD)
CN13 12 Srepping motor For Table moving, Up/Down.
CN14 8 Adsorption FANAssy Table adsorption FAN
CN15 2 Z origin sensor Origin sensor of the table.(OJ-6505-N2)

Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > 3042 Station3 PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.4 3042 Station3 PCB Assy. 2.0

destination CN

gram.
1
 Test point
2
TP1-4 GND

D9
D10
Sensor check of CN15 No. 2 Pin (Z origin sensor)
Sensor check of CN15 No. 5 Pin (not being used)
3
D11 Sensor check of CN15 No. 8 Pin (not being used)
D12 Sensor check of CN15 No. 11Pin (not being used)
4

F1 3.15A AC125V, DC60V +35V CN3
Confirmation point
Parts No. Pin No.
DC Power Voltage Remarks
5
EC1 [+] Pin +35V
EC2 [+] Pin +5VU +5V
EC12 [+] Pin +13V - +25.2V For FAN output (variable)
IC11
IC11
6Pin
1Pin
+5V
+3.3V 6
IC12 1Pin +1.5

Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.5 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy. 2.0
 Outline 3
Board name :3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy.
Mounted position :Y-Bar part
This PCB controls the head driving wave shape, the Y motor and other IOs. 4
Creating wave shape for head driv- HPC
ing
Connecting for Work Area sensor Beem sensor (Light receiving side)
Connecting for Water cooling sys-
utem of the UV sytem
Radiator FAN, Water cooling pump, Float sensor of the subtank
5
Connecting for Cover sensor. Micro SW
Connecting for the Motor Y-Motor, Y-Encorder
Connection between PCBs 20-pin FFC connection (3042 Station3 PCB connection)
6
(Serial IO I/F)
Connection between PCBs 30-pin FFC connection, twisted pair cable connection (LAN cable is used) .
(HDC I/F) (UJF-3042 MAIN PCB, 3042 Slider PCB)
Connection between PCBs 10-pin FFC connection (3042 Pump3 PCB connection)
(Serial IO I/F)
7

destination CN
CN1 12 3042 SL-Relay power short Assy Using for Power of the LED-UV.
CN2 30 UJF-3042 MAIN PCB Assy CN6 HDC IO
8
CN3 30 3042 Slider PCB Assy CN2 HDC IO
CN4 2 Micro SW(D3M-01K1-3) Cover sensor
CN5 12 3042 Slider PCB Assy CN1 Slider Relay PCB - Slider PCB Serializer I/F
CN6 12 UJF-3042 MAIN PCB Assy CN8 Main PCB - Slider Relay PCB Serializer I/F
CN7 30 3042 Slider PCB Assy CN4 GND etc
CN8 30 3042 Slider PCB Assy CN6 COM wave I/F
CN9 9 Not Use JTAG IF (CPLD writing or For FPGA JTAG TEST)
CN10 4 Cartridge sensor Assy For cartrdge 1

Rev.

destination CN
CN13 16 Water cooling pump
1
CN17 6 Float switch Assy Monitor of quantity of Cooling water
CN18 10 Not Use General-purpose sensor input, or IC TAG I/F
CN19 12 ID Contact PCB CN032Assy x 6 CN1 For Ink IC reading
CN20 5 Not Use
CN21
CN22
4
2
Not Use
Water cooling FAN Assy
+35V General-purpose output
Radiator FAN 2
CN23 20 Not Use 20 Pin serial IO
CN24 2 Heat radiation FAN Assy CN4 For heat sink
CN25 3 IPPR3_Cascade short 13Assy Short pin
3
CN26 16 3042 Pump3 PCBAssy CN2 16 Pin serial IO
CN27 5 Beem sensor Assy Light receiving side
CN28 12 Y -Motor Y-motor drive
CN29 6 Y -Motor Y-motor encorder
4
gram.
 Test point

TP14, TP16, TP17 GND
TP13 +37V
5

D2
D5
Write check of U6 (CPLD). If it is written, it lights.
Fuse check of F2. If the fuse blown out, it is turned off. 6
D24 Sensor check of CN17 No. 2 Pin (float switch)
7
D34 For +35V power supply check (If it is turned on, it lights.)
D39 CN27 No. 4 Pin (multipurpose input sensor)
8

F1 5A AC125V, DC60V +35V CN3
F2 1A AC125V, DC60V +37V
F3 3.15A AC125V, DC60V +35V CN23, CN26
F4 3.15A AC125V, DC60V +5V CN23, CN26

Rev.

Parts No. Pin No.
C2 [+] Pin +35V
Q3 1Pin +37V
C52 [+] Pin +5V
C71
U9
[+] Pin
1Pin
+12V - +30.4V
+3.3V
For FAN output (variable)
1
U10 1Pin +2.5V
U11 1Pin +1.2V
U18 4Pin +15V
U18
U17
7Pin
4Pin
-15V
-7.65V
2

Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > 3042 Pump3 PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.6 3042 Pump3 PCB Assy. 2.0
2
 Outline
Board name :3042 Pump3 PCB Assy.
Mounted position :Y-Bar part
 Main specifications 3
This PCB is used for the power supply at floodlighting side of the UJF-3042 /FX station part and the beam sensor
Assy.
4
Stepping moter control(For Ink pump) Controls the pump motors up to four.
Stepping moter control(For Wiper mov- Controls the wiper motor.
ing)
Connecting for Wiper origin sensor Reads the wiper origin sensor.
Wipe Suction Pump control Controls the wipe suction pump.
Work area sensor Beem sensor (Projection of the light side)
 List of Connectors 5
destination CN
CN1 4 Not Use +35V (Preliminary power supply)
CN2
CN3
16
16
3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy
Not Use
CN26 16 Pin SERIAL I/O
Connector is not mounted. 6
CN5 8 Wiper sensor cabel Assy Wiper origin sensor
CN6 9 Not Use JTAG I/F(CPLD)
7
CN8 2 Work area sensor Assy Projection of the light side)
CN9 2 Wipe Suction Pump
CN10 16 Stepping motor For Ink pump (Max. four pumps)
CN11 16 Stepping motor For wiper

gram. 8
 Test point

TP1 - 4 GND

Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > 3042 Pump3 PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.6 3042 Pump3 PCB Assy. 2.0

Parts No. Pin No.
EC1 [+] Pin +35V
EC2 [+] Pin +5V
IC3 4Pin +3.3V
RA10 5Pin +24V
1

Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > ID Contact PCB CN032 Assy.
Rev.
2.3.7 ID Contact PCB CN032 Assy. 2.0
 Outline
Board name :ID Contact PCB CN032 Assy.
Mounted position :Cartridge Guide No1 - No.6
2
UJF-3042 /FX uses six of this PCB.

It is equipped with the point of contact for reading the cartridge ID.
3

destination CN
4
CN1 2 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy CN19

gram.

Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > 3042 Slider PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.8 3042 Slider PCB Assy. 2.0
 Outline
Board name :3042 Slider PCB Assy.
2
Mounted position :Carriage
This PCB controls three print heads, LED-UV and other IOs.
Print Head control Available up to three (6 nozzle lines)

3
LED-UV control Controls the maximum of two UVLED-DRIVE PCBs.
Y-origin sensor Origin sensor of the carriage.
Linear encoder signal Enters the encoder PCB signal.
Other IO
It is equipped with the multipurpose IO.
4
destination CN
CN1 16 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy CN5 3042 Slider Relay PCB&3042 Slider PCB Serializer I/F
CN2
CN3
30
3
IPPR3_Cascade short 13 Assy
CN3 HDC IO
Short pin
5
CN4 30 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy CN7 GND & etc
CN5 9 Not Use JTAG I/F (CPLD writing and FPGA JTAG TEST)
CN6 30 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy CN8 “COM” Wave I/F
6
CN7 50 Print Head (EVEN) Head control 1
CN8 50 Print Head (ODD) Head control 1
CN13
CN14
50
50
Not Use
Not Use
Connector is not mounted
Connector is not mounted
7
CN15 22 LEDUVx2-DRIVE PCB CN1 LED-UV Control
Thermistor1 TH Connects with the thermistor 1 on the UVLED PCB.
Thermistor2 TH Connects with the thermistor 2 on the UVLED PCB.
8
CN16 16 Not Use 16 Pin SERIAL I/O
CN17 8 LED Pointer Use for LED pointer
Mist Absorption FAN 5V Axial flow FAN
UVDRV cooling FAN 5V Axial flow FAN
CN18 10 Not Use General-purpose io
CN19 7 Y-origin sensor Origin sensor for slider. (OJ-6505-N2)
Encorder PCB Assy CN1 Reading signal from Encorder PCB.
CN20 4 Not Use General-purpose analog input.
gram.

Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > 3042 Slider PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.8 3042 Slider PCB Assy. 2.0
 Test point

TP8 - 11 GND
TP1 - 7 signal For debug
Parts No.,
F1
Rate
5A AC125V, DC60V
Using Voltage
+35V
Remark
1
F2 2A AC125V, DC60V +35V CN16
Confirmation point
Parts No. Pin No.
DC Power Voltage Remarks
2
C3 [+] Pin +35V-1 +35V
Q8 [+] Pin +35V-2 For UV Lump
C17 [+] Pin +37V
C75
U11
[+] Pin
1Pin
+5V
+3.3V 3
U12 1Pin +2.5V
U13 1Pin +1.2V

Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Encorder PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.9 Encorder PCB Assy. 2.0
2
 Outline
Board name :Encorder PCB Assy.
Mounted position :Carriage part
It is located on the left rear of the carriage and reads the Y shaft linear encoder scale for 150dpi.
3
Parts No. Pin Connected to:* Connecting destina- Remarks
tion CN
CN1 4 3042 Slider PCB Assy CN19 For Linear encorder
gram. 4

Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > LEDUVx2-DRIVE PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.10 LEDUVx2-DRIVE PCB Assy. 2.0
 Outline 2
Board name :LEDUVx2-DRIVE PCB Assy.
Mounted position :UV control part
Performs ON/OFF of the LED-UV PCB and brightness adjustment. 3

LED-UV control Brightness is adjustable by one. Drives eight LED-UVs.
Cascade connection By the cascade connection, expansion of UVLED-DRIVE PCB is available.

4
destination CN
CN1 8 3042 Slider PCB Assy CN15 UVLEDx2-DRIVE power
CN2 16 3042 Slider PCB Assy CN15&CN18 UVLEDx2-DRIVE PCB control
CN3
CN4
9
2
JTAG
DC FAN (+5V)
For CPLD writing
+5V DC FAN (~`0.5A) 5
CN5 10 Water cool LED_1inch-UVLED CN1 Controls four LEDUVs & one thermistor.
PCB Assy
CN6 10 Water cool LED_1inch-UVLED CN1 Controls four LEDUVs & one thermistor.
PCB Assy
gram. 6
 Test point
7
TP1 GND

D2 For checking fo thr +5V power supply
8
D3 For checking fo thr Power suplly of the LEDUV

Parts No. Pin No.
EC1 [+] Pin +35Pin
U3 5Pin 5Pin
U3 4Pin +3.3Pin

Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Water cool LED_1inch-UVLED PCB Assy.
Rev.
2.3.11 Water cool LED_1inch-UVLED PCB Assy. 2.0
2
 Outline
Board name :Water cool LED_1inch-UVLED PCB Assy.
3
Mounted position :UV control part
This PCB has four LED-UVs and is made of copper to improve dissipation performance of heat generated from
LED. Though this copper PCB is controlled by water cooling, also thermistor can monitor it in order not to be
broken because the temperature becomes too high.
LED-UV
Thermistor
Has four LED-UVs.
Temperature of PCB can be controlled by the thermistor.
4
CN1 10 UVLEDx2-DRIVE PCB Assy

destination CN
CN2 Connect to LED 5
3042 Slider PCBAssy CN15 Thermistor connecion
gram.

Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Ink Related Parts
3. Workflow
3.1 3.2 3.3
3
Ink Related Parts Driving Parts Electrical Parts
3.4 3.5
Sensors UV UNIT
4

Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Ink Related Parts > Replacement of Head Unit
Rev.
3.1.1 Replacement of Head Unit 2.0
Head 2
 Never rotate the screws which are not instructed to do so in the following procedure.
Head adjustment is not required when the Head is disassembled or assembled at the user
side.Never rotate the hexagon socket head screws (cap screws) , which are used for adjustment or
attachment.
 Basically, items of the Check category in the following list only require a check of each condition, and
3
they do not require adjustment work. Only when adjustment is necessary, refer to the reference pages.
 List of Replacement Procedures
Ink
Item Work operation
1.  Preparation of new Head, discharge
Description
Discharge the ink and then clean the ink path and Head.
Ref.
4.2.5
4
of ink and cleaning of Head Perform the steps before the Protective solution
charge in [HEAD WASH] of [#ADJUST].
Power OFF 2.  Main power OFF –
Covers 3.  Removal of the covers Remove the Front Cover, Upper Cover, Head Cover and Slider
PCB Cover.
6.1.1 5
Print Head Unit 4.  Cleaning of the new Head Assy Clean the new Head by the cleanig liquid, befor leplacement of the 6.2.1
print head.
6
5.  Removal of the Head Remove the old Print Head..
6.  Mounting of the Head Mount the cleaned new Head.
Covers 7.  Mounting of the covers Mount the covers which have been removed. 6.1.1
Power ON 8.  Main power ON –
7
Ink 9.  Ink charging to Head Charge the ink and perform test printing. –
Make sure that there is no Nozzle Out or Deflection.
Reset 10.  Reset the Shot Count Reset SHOT COUNTS and OFFSET VOLT of the relevant head 4.2.18
Reset the Offset Voltage with “RESET SHOT CNTS” of “#ADJUST”.
Check 11.  Check of Head Slant Adjustment Print a pattern of [#SLANT ADJUST] and check the Head Slant 4.2.2
(within #ADJUST) Adjustment.
12.  Check of Head Back/Forth Adjust-
ment
Print a pattern of [#POSITION ADJUST] and check the Back/
Forth Adjustment of the Head.
4.2.2 8
(within #ADJUST)
13.  Check of PRINT Adjustment Print a pattern of [#PRINT ADJUST] and check the PRINT 4.2.1
(within #ADJUST) Adjustment.
Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
Ink may get in your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you touch
the ink.

Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Ink Related Parts > Replacement of Dumper
Rev.
3.1.2 Replacement of Dumper 2.0
2
Dumper
 List of Replacement Procedures 3

Item Work operation Description Ref.
Ink 1.  Discharge of ink Discharge the ink and then clean the ink path and Head. 4.2.5
Perform the steps before the Protective solution
Power OFF 2.  Main power OFF

–
4
Covers 3.  Removal of the covers. Remove the Front Cover, Upper Cover, Head Cover and Slider 6.1.1
PCB Cover.
5
Dumper 4.  Removal of the Dumper Remove the Dumper of the target Head. 6.2.2
Make sure not to leak ink.
5.  Mounting of the Dumper Mount the new Dumper.
Ink 8.  Ink filling Charge the ink to the Sub-tank replaced. – 6

7
the ink.

Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Ink Related Parts > Replacement of Pump Head
Rev.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / Remark
3.1.3 Replacement of Pump Head 2.0
2
Pump Head 2 Pump Head 3
Pump Head 1

Covers 2.  Removal of the covers Remove the Front Cover, Rear Cover-Right, Station Cover. 6.1.1 3
Station Assy 3.  Removal of the Station Assy Remove the Station Assy. 6.2.4
Pump Head 4.  Removal of the Pump Head Remove the Pump Head to be replaced. 6.2.3
Make sure not to leak ink.
Greasing
Pump Head
5.  Lubrication
6.  Pump tube aging

Apply the grease contained together with the Pump Head.
Rotate the pump with an electric screwdriver for one minute and 6.2.3
4
more.
7.  Mounting of the Pump Head Mount the Pump Head.
5
Station Assy 8.  Mounting of the Station Assy Mount the Station Assy. 6.2.4
 Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
Ink may get in your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you
touch the ink. 6
 Wipe the blue cover of Pump Head with a dry cloth for cleaning.
Never use any chemicals such as alcohol, remover or the like since it may result in cracks or surface
separations of cover.
7
 Be sure to perform Pump tube aging.
Otherwise, it may cause power swing of the pump motor or abnormal noise.

Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Ink Related Parts > Replacement of Cartridge Guide Assy.
Rev.
3.1.4 Replacement of Cartridge Guide Assy. 2.0
Cartridge Guide Assy.

Ink 1.  Discharge of ink Discharge the ink and then clean the ink path and Head. 4.2.5

–
4
Covers 3.  Removal of the covers. Remove the Carriage Cover and Rear Cover. 6.1.1
Disassembly 4.  Removal of the Cartridge Guide Remove the Cartridge Guide Assy.. 6.2.6
5
and
Reassembly 5.  Replacement of Cartridge Coupling Replace the Cartridge Coupling Assy.. 6.2.7
Assy.
(Perform this process if needed.)
6.  Mounting of the Cartridge Guide Mount the Cartridge Guide Assy.. 6.2.6
Power ON 8.  Main power ON – 6

Ink 9.  Ink filling Fill the ink. –
7
the ink.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. 3.1.4 R.1.1

R.2.0 P.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Ink Related Parts > Replacement of Cartridge Coupling Assy.
Rev.
3.1.5 Replacement of Cartridge Coupling Assy. 2.0
Cartridge Coupling Assy.
2
Ink
Item Work operation
1.  Discharge of ink
Description
Discharge the ink and then clean the ink path and Head.
Ref.
4.2.5
3
Covers 3.  Removal of the covers. Remove the Carriage Cover and Rear Cover. 6.1.1
4
Disassembly 4.  Removal of the Cartridge Guide Remove the Cartridge Guide. 6.2.6
and
Reassembly 5.  Removal of Cartridge Coupling Assy. Remove the Cartridge Coupling Assy.. 6.2.7
6.  Mounting of Cartridge Coupling Mount the Cartridge Coupling Assy..

Assy.
7.  Mounting of the Cartridge Guide Mount the Cartridge Guide 6.2.6
5

6
the ink.
7

Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Driving Parts
3. Workflow
3.1 3.2 3.3
3
3.4 3.5
Sensors UV UNIT
4

Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Driving Parts > Replacement of Z-Driving Screw
Rev.
3.2.1 Replacement of Z-Driving Screw 2.0
Z-Driving Screw
2
3
Advance prepa- 1.  Arrangement of Y-Bar, Head and Move the Y-Bar to the farthest position and bring the Head to the
–
ration Table cap position. Raise the Table to the highest position.
Covers 3.  Removal of the covers. Remove the following covers. 6.1.1

• Front Cover •Rear Cover-TB
4
Disassembly 4.  Removal of the Tabel. Remove the Table. 6.3.3
and
Reassembly 5.  Replacement of Z-Driving Screw. Replace the Z-Driving Screw. 6.3.4
6.  Mounting of the Table. Mount the Table. 6.3.3
5
Check 8.  Check of Table up/down operation Execute [#TEST] -> [#AGEING].-> [Z SERVO] 4.2.6

Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Driving Parts > Replacement of Tabel Absorption Fan
Rev.
3.2.2 Replacement of Tabel Absorption Fan 2.0
Table Absorption Fan Assy
2
Table backside
3
Advance prepa- 1.  Arrangement of Y-Bar, Head and Move the Y-Bar to the farthest position and bring the Head to the
–
ration Table cap position. Raise the Table to the highest position.
Covers 3.  Removal of the covers. Remove the following covers. 6.1.1

• Front Cover •Rear Cover-TB
4
Disassembly 4.  Removal of the Tabel. Remove the Table. 6.3.3
and
Reassembly 5.  Replacement of Table Absorption Replace the Table Absorption Fan. 6.3.7
Fan.
6.  Mounting of the Table. Mount the Table. 6.3.3
Power ON 8.  Main power ON – 5

Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Electrical Parts
3. Workflow
3.1 3.2 3.3
3
3.4 3.5
Sensors UV UNIT
4

Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Electrical Parts > Replacement of Main PCB
Rev.
3.3.1 Replacement of Main PCB 2.0
Main PCB Assy.

2
 Outline
If Main PCB Assy. has replaced, various parameters must be registered to Main PCB ROM after the replacement.
Considerable time is required to readjust and reconfigure these settings. Therefore, for ease of use and better printing
quality, copy (upload) the setting value to a PC before replacement, and write (download) the copied settings onto the
3
Main PCB from the PC after replacement.
If it is impossible to upload the parameters, conduct Parameter Draw to note the setting values.
Then manually register the values after replacing the PCB.
4

Advance prepa- 1.  Parameter upload
ration
Before the PCB is replaced, upload its parameter to the PC. *1
5
Covers 3.  Removal of covers. Pull the Power Supply Chassis from the back. 6.1.1
6
Main PCB 4.  Removal of the Main PCB Assy. Remove the Main PCB Assy.. 6.4.2
Assy.
5.  Mounting of the Main PCB Assy. Mount the Main PCB Assy..
Check 7.  Updating the firmware Upgrade the firmware to the latest version. *1
8.  Parameter initialization Start up the machine in maintenance mode and initialize the param-
eters. 7
9.  Parameter download Download the parameter which has been uploaded in the operation *1
“1”.
Covers 10.  Mounting of the covers Put the Power Supply Chassis in the original place. 6.1.1
* See “SERVICE DOCUMENTS”. 8

Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Electrical Parts > Replacement of 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy
Rev.
3.3.2 Replacement of 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy 2.0
1
 Outline
If 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy. has replaced, various parameters must be registered to 3042 Slider Relay PCB ROM
2
after the replacement. Considerable time is required to readjust and reconfigure these settings. Therefore, for ease of
use and better printing quality, copy (upload) the setting value to a PC before replacement, and write (download) the
copied settings onto the Main PCB from the PC after replacement.
If it is impossible to upload the parameters, conduct Parameter Draw to note the setting values. 3
Then manually register the values after replacing the PCB.
Item Work operation Description Ref. 4

Advance prepa- 1.  Parameter upload Before the PCB is replaced, upload its parameter to the PC. *1
ration
Covers
3042 Slider
3.  Removal of covers.
4.  Removal of the 3042 Slider Relay

Remove the Rear Cover.
Remove the 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy..
6.1.1
6.4.3
5
Relay PCB PCB Assy.
Assy
5.  Mounting of the 3042 Slider Relay Mount the 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy.
PCB Assy
6
Check 8.  Parameter download Download the parameter which has been uploaded in the operation *1
“1”.
9.  Inputting the serial No. From “#ADJUST” , input the serial No.
* See “SERVICE DOCUMENTS”.

7

Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Electrical Parts > Replacement of ID Contact PCB
Rev.
3.3.3 Replacement of ID Contact PCB 2.0
ID Contact PCB
ID Contact PCB

Ink 1.  Discharge of ink Discharge the ink in the path of slot applied, and remove all Ink 4.2.5
Cartridges of the Cartridge Unit.
Power OFF 2.  Main power OFF – 4
Covers 3.  Removal of the covers. Remove the Rear Cover and Cartridge cover. 6.1.1
Disassembly 4.  Removal of the Cartridge Guide Remove the Cartridge Guide. 6.2.6
and
5.  Replacement of ID Contact PCB Replace the Cartridge Coupling Assy.. 6.4.7
5
Reassembly
6.  Mounting of the Cartridge Guide Mount the Cartridge Coupling Assy.. 6.2.6
6
7
the ink.

Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Sensors
3. Workflow
3.1 3.2 3.3
3
3.4 3.5
Sensors UV UNIT
4

Maintenance Manual > Workflow > UV UNIT
3. Workflow
3.1 3.2 3.3
3
3.4 3.5
Sensors UV UNIT
4

Maintenance Manual > Workflow > UV UNIT > Replacement of LEDUV Irradiation Assy
Rev.
3.5.1 Replacement of LEDUV Irradiation Assy 2.0
LEDUV Irradiation Assy

Cooling Water 1.  Drain the cooling water Drain the cooling water of the LED-UV Unit 4.2.8

“#ADJUST EXCHANGE LED UV”
-
3
Covers 3.  Removal of the covers Remove the Front Cover, Upper Cover. 6.1.1
LED-UV UNIT 4.  Removal and disassembling of the Remove the LED-UV UNIT and disassemble it. 6.7.1
4
LED-UV UNIT
5.  Replacing Assy Replace the LED-UV irradiation Assy.
6.  Assembling of the LED-UV UNIT Assemble the LED-UV UNIT and attach it.
and attaching it
Cooling Water
Power ON
8.  Filling cooling water
9.  Main power ON
Fill cooling water of the LED-UV UNIT “Total amount: 450ml”. -
-
5
Operation 10.  Operation checking of the LED- UV Check the operation of the LED - UV UNIT -
check UNIT
6

Maintenance Manual > Workflow > UV UNIT > Replacement of LEDUVx2-DRIVE PCB Assy
Rev.
3.5.2 Replacement of LEDUVx2-DRIVE PCB Assy 2.0
1
LEDUVx2-DRIVE PCB Assy

Cooling Water 1.  Drain the cooling water Drain the cooling water of the LED-UV Unit 4.2.8

“#ADJUST EXCHANGE LED UV”
-
3
Covers 3.  Removal of the covers Remove the Front Cover, Upper Cover. 6.1.1
LED-UV UNIT 4.  Removal and disassembling of the Remove the LED-UV UNIT and disassemble it until PCB can be 6.7.1
4
LED-UV UNIT replaced.
Perform the procedures up to the Step 11. of “6.7.1 LED-UV
UNIT”
5.  Exchange the PCB Exchange the LEDUVx2-DRIVE PCB Assy.
6.  Assembling of the LED-UV UNIT Assemble the LED-UV UNIT and attach it.
and attaching it
Covers 7.  Mounting of the covers Mount the covers which have been removed. 6.1.1 5
Cooling Water 8.  Filling cooling water Fill cooling water of the LED-UV UNIT “Total amount: 450ml”. -
Power ON 9.  Main power ON -
Operation 10.  Operation checking of the LED- UV Check the operation of the LED - UV UNIT -
check UNIT
6

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Operation Matrix
4. Adjustment
4.1 4.2 4.3
4
Operation Matrix Adjustment Items Mechanical Adjustment

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items
4. Adjustment
4.1 4.2 4.3
4

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > PRINT ADJUST
Rev.
4.2.1 PRINT ADJUST 2.0
 Outline
Draw the built-in patterns, and compensate the parameter so that the drop positions of other heads are on the same
line as the drop position of reference head (Head 1) in the Y-direction.
 Work Procedures
1. Set Media at X-origin
1
FUNCTION .
#ADJUST <ent> Set the drawing origin as follows;

(Set in [LOCAL] -> [ORIGIN])
#ADJUST X Š 0, Y > 0
PRINT ADJUST <ent>
2. Display [#ADJUST] -> [PRN.adjust].
2
#PRINT ADJUST
SELCT :SiDir 3. Select “SiDir” on the [SELECT] display.
#PRINT ADJUST 4. Press the [ENTER] key to draw the pattern.

SiDir:PRINT
[ENTER]: To start Pattern drawing
3
Pattern drawing []: Screen to input compensation value
(Without drawing)
[] [] []: To start Jog mode (move the drawing origin)
5. Check and compensate the patterns.

Check and execute the compensation for H1A-H1B~H4B.
[] / []: Compensating value input
4
[ENTER]: Confirms (Next)
Enlarged (x60) Input unit: 35 µm (720dpi)
Reference head mark
Input the compensating value, referring to the figure
below, if the displacement on the drop position of 5
head applied for the compensation occurs either right
or left against the reference head.
Reference head
Head under adjustment
Reference
head
Head under adjustment 6
Adjust on the same line as Reference head
Reference head.
7
Head under
#PRINT ADJUST adjustment
H1A-H1B : 0.0
-99.9~99.9
6. When compensated, draw and check the patterns again.
#PRINT ADJUST
H1A-H4B : 0.0 Repeat “Drawing -> Checking (Compensating)” until
8
-99.9~99.9 any compensation is not required.

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > HEAD ADJUST
Rev.
4.2.2 HEAD ADJUST 2.0
 Outline
On the drawing with the built-in patterns, the slant and the back and forth positions of each head are checked and
mechanically adjusted.
 [HEAD ADJUST] consists of the slant adjustment and back/forth adjustment.

When either one of the above is adjusted, be sure to check the other. If any adjustment is required,
repeat both of the adjustments alternately until any adjustment is not required on both.
 When the head adjustment is incorrect, be sure to execute the adjustment since it affects other param-
1
eter adjustments.
2
 Head Adjusting Flow
START
Pattern print (Slant adjust: Normal)

Adjusting (Slant adjust: Normal)
Head Slant
Pattern check
Normal?
No
3
Adjustment Yes
(refer to Page2)
Pattern print (Slant adjust: Fine)
Adjusting (Slant adjust: Fine)
4
Pattern check No
Normal?
Yes
Pattern print (Position adjust) 1, 2

Head Back/Forth Adjusting (Position adjust: Normal) 1, 2
Adjustment (refer to
Page7)
5
Pattern check No
Normal?
Yes
Adjusted after Yes

Slant adjust?
No
6
Refer to PRINT ADJUST (4.2.1)

Rev.
 Outline of Head Slant Adjustment
12 34 (When CMWKWR is set)
3 nozzle
192 nozzle
56
150 dpi
1
192 nozzle
150 dpi
 Slant adjust: Normal
2 4 5
2
3
Enlarged Bad Good Exam-
X(+)-direction
Specified value:
0±10µm 5
Adjust so that the dots in the
overlapping area are in alignment.
 Slant adjust: Fine

6
2 4 5
Enlarged Bad Good Exam- 7
8
Specified value:
0±10µm
X(+)-direction Adjust so that the dots in the
overlapping area are in alignment.

Rev.
 Procedures of Head Slant Adjustment

1. Set Media at X-origin.
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
Set the drawing origin as follows;
#ADJUST
HEAD ADJUST <ent> X ≥ 0, Y > 0
#HEAD ADJUST
SLANT ADJUST <ent>
2. Display [#ADJUST] -> [HEAD ADJUST] -> [SLANTadjust]. 1
POSITION ADJUST <ent>
3. Select “NORMAL” on the mode selecting screen.
#HEAD ADJUST 4. Press the [ENTER] key to draw the pattern.

MODE :NORMAL
FINE [ENTER]: To start Pattern drawing 2
[] [] [] [] : To start Jog mode (move the drawing origin)
#SLANT ADJUST
PRINT START :ent
#SLANT ADJUST
PRINTING 3
5. Check if no displacement occurs between the 1st scanning and
the 2nd scanning of the head.
*If the adjustment is required, execute the Procedures of Head
Slant Adjustment Adjusting Procedure (p.4).
4
 Check patterns on all heads (1-8).
(Execute for all heads even when one head is
Specified value:
replaced.)
 If there is no displacement, execute “Procedures
5
0±10µm of Head Back/Forth Adjustment (p.7)” succes-
sively.
6. Select “FINE” on the mode selecting screen of

[#HEAD ADJUST] -> [SLANTadjust] then draw the pattern.
6
#HEAD ADJUST
SLANT ADJUST <ent>
POSITION ADJUST <ent> 7. Select “FINE” on the mode selecting screen.
8. Press the [ENTER] key to draw the pattern.

#HEAD ADJUST
MODE :FINE [ENTER]: To start Pattern drawing 7
NORMAL
[ONLINE]: Adjusts overlap amount (0~192)
#SLANT ADJUST
8
PRINT START :ent
#SLANT ADJUST
PRINTING

Rev.
9. Check if no displacement occurs between the 1st scanning and

the 4nd scanning of the head.
*If the adjustment is required, execute the Procedures of Head
Slant Adjustment Adjusting Procedure (p.4).
 Check patterns on all heads (1-8).
1
(Execute for all heads even when one head is
replaced.)
Specified value:  If there is no displacement, execute “Procedures
0±10µm of Head Back/Forth Adjustment (p.7)” succes-
sively.
2
 Procedures of Head Slant Adjustment Adjusting Procedure
1. Loosen the slant fixing screw of the target head.
3
Slant fixing screw
4
Head slant adjustment screw
To correct slanting left: CCW 2. Rotate the slant adjustment screw according to the amount of
5
displacement to adjust the slant.
Overlapped portion
Rough indication of turning angle: About 2.5 µm by one-eighth

rotation
Direction of turning the Micro Adjuster
6
To correct slanting left: Turn counterclockwise (CCW).
To correct slanting right: Turn clockwise (CW).
To correct slanting right: CW
3. Tighten the loosened slant fixing screw. 7

Overlapped portion
Tighten the screws with care that the head is not

shifted from the correct position.
X (+)
Y (+)
4. Redraw Patterns and check if there is no slanting.
8
Repeat “Adjusting” -> “Patterns Drawing” until no
more displacement is available.

Rev.
 Head Back/Forth Adjusting Patterns 1
1
head1 head2
Basic head Enlarged
2
192 nozzle
head3
3
3 nozzle
4
192 nozzle
Specified value:
0±10µm
head 1
head 2
5
Bad Good Exam-

Rev.
 Head Back/Forth Adjusting Patterns 2
The pattern below is drawn in 1 Pass. This is the pattern to adjust back and forth using overlap of the basic
Head and 3 nozzle of the Head 3.
head1
Basic head head2
1
192 nozzle
head3
2
3 nozzle
192 nozzle
Overlap of 3 nozzle
5
W Y M CL B C
Adjust three colors of Magenta, Yellow and Adjust three colors of Cyan, Black and Clear
White so that they are overlapped each other. so that they are overlapped each other.
Specified value : 0±10µm Specified value : 0±10µm

Rev.
 Procedures of Head Back/Forth Adjustment

1. Set Media at X-origin.
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
Set the drawing origin as follows;
#ADJUST
HEAD ADJUST <ent> X ≥ 0, Y > 0
#HEAD ADJUST
POSITION ADJUST <ent>
2. Display [#ADJUST] -> [HEAD ADJUST] -> [POSITION 1
SLANT ADJUST <ent> ADJUST].
3. Select either of the pattern 1 or the pattern 2.

#POSITION ADJUST
PATTERN : pattern1
pattern2
4. Press the [ENTER] key to draw the pattern.
[ENTER]: To start Pattern drawing
2
#POSITION ADJUST
PRINT START :ent [] [] [] [] :To start Jog mode (move the drawing origin)
3
5. Check if the space of pattern 1 is in compliance with the specifi-
Specified value: cation.
0±10µm
head 1
head 2 Specified value: head 1-2 : 0 ± 10 µm

head 1-3 : 254 ± 10 µm
4
(The space of each head shall be according to
the value shown in the left figure.)
• *If the pattern is out of the specification, execute the Head

back/forth adjustment (refer to Page8).
If the adjustment with [SLANT ADJUST] or [POSI-

TION ADJUST] is executed, check them again from
5
the beginning then repeat this process until any
adjustment is not required on both.

Rev.
 Head Back/Forth Adjustment Adjusting Procedure

1. Loosen the back/forth fixing screw of the target head.
2. Rotate the back/front adjustment screw according to the amount

of displacement to adjust the back and forth positions.
Rough indication of turning angle: About 5 µm by one-eighth 1

Back/forth fixing rotation
screw
Head back/forth Direction of turning the micro adjuster
adjustment screw
Dot position down: Turn clockwise (CW).
2
Dot position up: Turn counterclockwise (CCW).
3. Tighten the loosened back/forth fixing screw.
3
Tighten the screws with care that the head is not
shifted from the correct position.
4. Draw the pattern again and check if no displacement occurs.
Repeat “Adjusting” -> “Patterns Drawing” until no

more displacement is available. 4

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > CAPPING
Rev.
4.2.3 CAPPING 2.0
 Outline
Adjusts the location for capping and wiper. Adjusted value is saved in the system parameter.
 Adjustment procedure
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [CAPPING].
FUNCTION
1
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST
CAPPING <ent>
2. Adjust the capping position.

(1) Be sure to adjust it to the position at which the cap may con-
2
#CAPPING
CAP POS. = 0.0mm tact the head.
(2) Turn off the power supply, and check that the carriage does
not move to the table side.
3
Plus numeric Minus numeric
direction direction
[] / []: Horizontally shifts the head.

[ENTER]: Finalizes
[END]: End
 When the excitation of the motor has been cut, the

4
carriage may move to the table side by itself. At
this time, the cap Assy moves to the bottom, and it
results in capping defect. Therefore, be sure to
5
check (2) above.
Cap slider perspective diagram
6
Capping OK
Power OFF
7
The carriage moves by
itself.
The cap slider moves to the position at

which it goes down, and it results in cap-
CappingNG 8
ping defect.
3. After adjustment, register with the [END] key and then termi-
nate the operation.

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > ADJUST WIPER
Rev.
4.2.4 ADJUST WIPER 2.0
 Outline
Adjusts the wiper position.
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [ADJUST WIPER].
FUNCTION
1
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST
ADJUST WIPER <ent>
2. Confirm and adjust the center position of the head and the wiper
nozzle.
2
#ADJUST WIPER
WIPER POS. = 0.0
-20.0 ~20.0
[] / []: Horizontally shifts the head.
[ENTER]: Finalizes and end
[END]: End
3
3. After adjustment, register with the [END] key and then termi-
4
nate the operation.
Head
Wiper nozzle

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > HEAD WASH(#ADJUST)
Rev.
4.2.5 HEAD WASH(#ADJUST) 2.0
 Outline
Discharge the ink and clean the Tube, Dumper and Head using dedicated cleaning liquid. This process is normally
performed at the factory.
 As non-filling state remains after the completion of cleaning, the Initial Filling or filling of corresponding
head is required.
1
 There is a [HEAD WASH] item in [MAINTENANCE] function (open to users), however, it is different
from the procedure described in this section.
 Procedure of HEAD WASH

1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [HEAD WASH].
<LOCAL>
[FUNCTION]
2
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ENT>
#ADJUST
HEAD WASH <ent> 3
2. Select the Head to be cleaned.
WASH [] [] [] [] : Head selection
4
HEAD [MCYKWR]
WASH
REMOVE CARTRIDGE 3. Remove the INK CARTRIDGE of the Head to be cleaned.
When removal of the INK CARTRIDGE is confirmed, the next
WASHING step will be taken.
5
PLEASE WAIT
4. Ink discharge starts.
After a certain processing time, the next step will be taken.
5. Set the Cleaning Tool to the target slot and then press ENTER
WASH key.
6
SET CLEAN TOOL
[ENTER]
6. Cleaning liquid is taken in, and the ink path is cleaned.
WASHING
PLEASE WAIT After a certain processing time, the next step will be taken.
7. Remove the Cleaning Tool.
7
WASH
REMOVE TOOL When removal of the Cleaning Tool is confirmed, the next step
will be taken.
WASHING
PLEASE WAIT 8. Cleaning liquid is discharged.
8
This process is per-
9. The above steps 5 to 8 are performed again.
formed twice.
After that, the next step will be taken.
10. As it enters in the status waiting for tube cleaning work, fill
TUBE CLEANING
COMPLETED :ent
cleaning liquid inside the Air Bleeder Tube and when it is com-
pleted, press the ENTER key.

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > HEAD WASH(#ADJUST)
Rev.
4.2.5 HEAD WASH(#ADJUST) 2.0
* Cleaning method of Air Bleeder Tube
 For this work, the syringe is used, however, do not

pull out the piston when you connect with the air
drain port. It may absorb foreign object into the
nozzle and cause nozzle defect.
1
Fill 30ml of cleaning liquid for F-200 from the air drain port
located next to the head.
Use the jig of the syringe with the filter (Millex
Tube : SJ-MMK-3x5 SLLHH25NS) and extension tube.
Syringe
(1) Remove the jig from the air drain port.
2
(2) Fill air into the syringe and set again the jig whose filter was
replaced on the air drain port.
(3) Fill air into the air drain port by pulling out cleaning liquid.
Filter : SLLHH25NS (4) Remove the jig and cap the air drain port.
Fitting : VRM306 Press the ENTER key and proceed to the next step.
11. The machine becomes ready for Wiper cleaning. Perform Wiper 3
WIPER CLEANING cleaning and after that press ENTER key.
COMPLETED :ent
12. Select whether to finish Head cleaning or to continue.
WASH
4
END< >CONTINUE [] (END) : Finishes the HEAD WASH (this sequence).
[] (CONTINUE) : Goes to the protective solution charge
sequence.
（See below description for each selection.)
 When the HEAD WASH is finished, the initial
 When selecting finish

ink charge state is defined as unprocessed.
5
Returns to [#ADJUST] function selection window.
#ADJUST
HEAD WASH <ent>
 When selecting the Protective solution charge

6
1. Set the transfer tool containing protective solution to the ink
WASH slot.
SET TRANS TOOL
When attachment of transfer tool is confirmed, the next step
WASHING
PLEASE WAIT
will be taken.
7
2. Protective solution is taken in, and it is charged to the Tube,
Dumper and Head.
WASH
REMOVE TOOL After a certain processing time, the next step will be taken.
WASHING
3. Remove the Trans Tool. 8
PLEASE WAIT When removal of the Trans Tool is confirmed, the next step will
be taken.
#ADJUST
HEAD WASH <ent> 4. Protective solution is discharged.
5. Returns to [#ADJUST] function selection window.

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > HEAD ID
Rev.
4.2.6 HEAD ID 2.0
 Outline
HEAD ID represents each head characteristic written at shipping. The variation between heads is unified by inputting
the value to printer.
Additionally, the number of shots is cleared by setting the indication part of the number of shots to “0”.
1
As this machine reads the head ID from the mounted memory (ROM) on the print head at each startup, it
is not necessary to set the head ID.
You can confirm/change the head ID by the following procedures.

However, as the head ID you changed is not stored, it will return to the value set in the memory of the
print head when the power supply is turned OFF. 2
 Work Procedures
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [HEAD ID].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent> 3
#ADJUST
HEAD ID <ent>
2. Confirm the Head ID from the label stuck on head FFC.

4
P/N N2207920
S/N 0000-000000D For this machine, Vpp-Odd indicated on FFC of the
Even row side head represents the even row and Vpp-Even rep-
Vpp-Odd 16.4V
resents the odd row. Be careful about it.
5
Vpp-Even 16.1V Odd row side
3. Select the input nozzle row (ID).

HEAD ID HEAD[1]
Vod =27.0 Vev =27.0
6
4. Input the driving voltages (Vod, Vev).
Value of Vpp-Odd
HEAD ID HEAD[1]
Vod =27.0 Vev =27.2 Value of Vpp-Even
[ENTER]: To select Head
[] / []: To move Cursor.
[] / []: To change Value 7
[END]: To fix and end

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > HEAD TEMP
Rev.
4.2.7 HEAD TEMP 2.0
 Function
Confirms/sets the head temperature.
Under normal conditions, do not change this.
1
 Procedure
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [HEAD TEMP].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST 2
HEAD TEMP <ent>
#HEAD TEMP
2. Enter (confirm) the head temperature.
[] / []: Changes values.
3
TEMP = 45°C
[ENTER]: Confirms
[END]: Return

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > EXCHANGE LED UV
Rev.
4.2.8 EXCHANGE LED UV 2.0
 Outline
To exchange the LED-UV UNIT, the cooling water must be drained according to the following steps. This procedure
is used also for Water Cooling Device maintenance.
 Procedure of EXCHANGE LED UV

1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [EXCHANGE LED UV<ent>] then press
1
FUNCTION ENTER key.
#ADJUST <ENT>
The machine becomes ready for draining the water from the
#ADJUST Cooling water tank.
EXCHANGE LED UV<ent>
2
2. Drain the cooling water using a syringe.
3
3. When the machine confirms that the cooling water is drained, it
#EXCHANGE LED UV displays [WASTE AF :ent] in the window. Press Enter key.
WASTE AF :ent
4. [PLEASE WAIT] is displayed in the window. The Cooling 4
water Pump is activated and water inside the Tube is drained
#EXCHANGE LED UV
(directed to the tank).
PLEASE WAIT
#EXCHANGE LED UV
5. When [READY to EXCHANGE] is displayed in the window, 5
READY to EXCHANGE drain the cooling water from the tank again. Water should be
drained completely at this time.
6. After a while, the first menu will be displayed.
6
#ADJUST
EXCHANGE LED UV<ent>
Goes back to first menu
7. Charge the cooling water when LED-UV UNIT exchange is

completed.
Charge the full volume (450 ml) as in the case of installation or
cooling water exchange.
7

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > SERIAL No.
Rev.
4.2.9 SERIAL No. 2.0
 Outline
Confirming and changing of the serial No. of UJF-3042/FX.
Normally, don’t change the serial No., which has been registered.
1
 Work Procedures
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [SERIAL No.].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST 2
SERIAL No. <ent>
2. Confirm the serial No., or change it.
3
#SERIAL No.
S/N 00000000 [] / []: To move Cursor
[] / []: To change Value
[ENTER]: Confirms
[END]: Return

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > DEALER No.
Rev.
4.2.10 DEALER No. 2.0
 Outline
Check and set the dealer No.
For dealer No., 8-digit alphameric characters (0 to 9, A to Z) can be input.
 Procedures
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [DEALER No.].
1
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ENT>
#ADJUST
DEALER No. <ENT>
2. Input (check) the dealer No.

2
#DEALER No.
D/N : 10000000 [] / [] : Changing value
[] / [] : Moving cursor
3
(When the cursor is at the right end or the left end, even if the key is
pressed, it does not move.)
[ENTER] : Confirmation
[END] : Cancel

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > ORIGIN ADJUST
Rev.
4.2.11 ORIGIN ADJUST 2.0
1
Origin Seal
25
2
32
 Outline
The pattern is drawn and the origin position (the drawing reference point located at the front right) is parameter-com-
pensated.
3
 Work Procedures
1. Display [#ADJUST] -> [ORIGIN ADJUST].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
4
2. Press the [] key to draw the pattern.
#ADJUST
ORIGIN ADJUST <ent> []: To execute Pattern drawing
#ORIGN ADJUST []: To initialize Adjustment value

CLEAR < > DRAW
#ORIGN ADJUST 5
PRINTING
3. Compensate it so that the corner part of pattern and the inside
6
#ORIGN ADJUST
corner part of Origin Seal align on the same line.
X=***.* Y=***.*
Specified value: X=22.0 Y=32.0
7
[],[]: To move Cursor.
Pattern [],[]: To change Compensating value

(unit: 0.1 mm)
[ENTER]: To register Compensating value
Origin
4. After compensated, draw the pattern again, and then check the
displacement and compensate it if necessary.
8
Form

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > TABLE ADJUST
Rev.
4.2.12 TABLE ADJUST 2.0
 Outline
[#TABLE ADJUST] consists of the following 4 items.
Item Function
GAP PIN Measure the Head gap and register the measured value, and then adjust it to the length of Gap pin.
Z-ORIGIN SENSOR Compensate the height of Z-origin sensor automatically.
TABLE CHECK Measure the height of specified point with the Gap Pin, and indicate the relative value from the reference point
(1.1).
The description is omitted in this manual since the adjustment is impossible in field.
1
FLAT PATTERN Draws the pattern to check the flatness of table.
 Procedures of GAP PIN
FUNCTION
1. Display [#ADJUST] -> [TABLE ADJUST]. 2
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST
TABLE ADJUST <ent>
3
2. 2. Set ON/OFF of the slider.
#TABLE ADJUST
SLIDER :ON [] / [] : Switches
4
OFF
3. Confirm with the [ENTER] key to terminate the setting.

#TABLE ADJUST
CPMPLETED :ent
[ENTER]: Confirms
5
[END]: Return

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > SET QUALITY
Rev.
4.2.13 SET QUALITY 2.0
 Outline
Setting of the operation mode of user-setting print quality.
 SET QUALITY List of Items
No Item Description
1 Resolution selection 300, 600, 900, 1200
2 Print quality selection NORMAL, FINE, FAST 1
3 Number of passes selection 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 18, 24, 32
4 High-speed scan selection ON/ OFF
2
 Work Procedures
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [SET QUALITY].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST
3
SET QUALITY <ent>
2. Select then change the resolution (DPI).

#SET QUALITY
X DPI : 300 [] / []: Switch
600
4
900
1200 [END]: Return
3. Select then change the print quality.

#SET QUALITY
[] / []: Switch
5
QUALITY :NORMAL
FINE [ENTER]: Confirms (Next)
FAST
[END]: Return
4. Select then change the number of partition passes.
#SET QUALITY
[] / []: Switch
6
PASS : 2pass
[END]: Return
5. Select then change ON/OFF of the High-speed scan.
#SET QUALITY
7
HIGHSPEED :OFF  This can be set if the number of partition passes is
ON not minimum.
[] / []: Switch

[ENTER]: Confirms (End)
8
[END]: Return

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > FEED COMP.2
Rev.
4.2.14 FEED COMP.2 2.0
 Function
Compensates basic feeding amount of media. (Provides a baseline value for user compensation value.)
Adjust this when the parameter is initialized or the head is replaced.
2
 By this adjustment, the user compensation value is cleared.
 Procedure
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [FEED COMP 2].
FUNCTION
3
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST
FEED COMP 2 <ent>
2. Draw an adjustment pattern.

#FEED COMP 2
PRINT START :ent [ENTER]: Executes drawing. 4
[]: To the screen for adjustment
Pattern drawing (Without drawing)
[END]: Completes drawing and inputs compensation
5
value.
3. Check the adjustment pattern.

A pattern having width of
media is drawn.
Resolution is 150 dpi.
Compensation value is
6
too large.
Compensation value is
too small.
7
4. Enter the compensation value.
Compensation value: -500 to 500
8
#FEED COMP 2
ADJUST = 0
[] / []: Changes adjustment values.
[END]: Cancellation of input
 n actual feeding amount compensation, compensa-

tion value for each feed set in the SETUP function
are added to this compensation value.

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > ANGLE ADJUST
Rev.
4.2.15 ANGLE ADJUST 2.0
Compensating to the (+) side
Y-bar part
Compensation
value (+) side
Pattern right end
Compensation
value (-) side
Compensating to the (-) side 1

Pattern right end
Section Paper
2
 Outline
The displacement amount is measured by overlapping the Section Paper on the pattern drawn, correct the tilt of the Y
bar part with the adjusting screw located at the back of the X bar.
 About full adjustment in the field 3

Basically, full adjustment is the work in the production process, and it is not recommended to per-
form it in the field because there are too many restrictions. Therefore, this chapter shall be used for
reference of emergency measure.
That is because it is required to fix the base of the Y bar movable in the LM guide tightly before
adjustment and the accuracy of this fixing directly affects the adjustment accuracy. In addition, it is 4
very difficult to perform this fixing in the field with high accuracy.
 Work Procedures
5
1. Set Media.
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
2. Display [#ADJUST] -> [ANGLE ADJUST].
#ADJUST
ANGLE ADJUST <ent>
3. Press the [ENTER] key to draw a square pattern.
#ANGLE ADJUST
PRINT START :ent 6
#ANGLE ADJUST
PRINTING
7
4. Check the displacement amount of the line of the right side
Enlarged
when the Section paper is overlapped on the pattern drawn and
±0.2 mm
8
the right bottom corner and the bottom side are put together.
Pattern Specified value: within ± 0.2 mm
(280x280)
• *End the work when the displacement amount is within 0.2

mm.
Put together

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > DEFAULT SET
Rev.
4.2.16 DEFAULT SET 2.0
 Outline
Returning each parameter to the initial value.
 DEFAULT SET List of Items
No Item Operation Remarks

1 SYSTEM param Initialize the parameter in question.
2 MAINTE param Initialize the parameter in question. 1
3 SERVO param Initialize the parameter in question.
4 FEED param Initialize the parameter in question.
5 HEAD param Initialize the parameter in question.
6
7
INK param. 1
INK param. 2
Initialize the parameter in question.
2
8 SCAN param Initialize the parameter in question.
9 WAVE PARAM 1 Initialize the parameter in question.
10 WAVE PARAM 2
11 WAVE PARAM 3
3
12 WAVE PARAM 4 Initialize the parameter in question.
13 SHIPPING set Initializing parameters of others than the adjustments.
 Work Procedures 4
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [DEFAULT SET].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
5
#ADJUST
DEFAULT SET <ent>
2. Select the parameter to be initialized, and then fix it by

#DEFAULT SET [ENTER].
SYSTEM param. <ent>
6
MAINTE param. [] / []: Switch
SERVO param.
: [ENTER]: Confirms (to Confirmation display)
[END]: Return
3. Initialize by [ENTER].
#DEFAULT SET
INITIAL. OK? :ent
[ENTER]: Execute 7
[END]: Return
Parameter initialized

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > Head Voltage Adjustment
Rev.
4.2.17 Head Voltage Adjustment 2.0
 Outline
This section describes the head voltage adjustment which is performed when the ink discharge becomes unstable and
the deflection of ink drop flight path occurs. As an adjusted value, an offset value for the head-specific reference volt-
age is set.
If this adjustment does not improve the situation, the head needs to be replaced.
 Check
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
1. Set the media in the table.
1
2. Select [#ADJUST] -> [HEAD VOLT ADJ].
#ADJUST
HEAD VOLT ADJ <ent>
2
3. Select “CHECK” for [SELECT].
#HEAD VOLT ADJUST

SELECT :CHECK
ADJUST
4. Press [ENTER] and print a pattern.
[ENTER]: Starts printing a pattern.
#HEAD VOLT ADJUST
PRINT START :ent
3
HEAD TEMP. CONTROL
PLEASE WAIT
4
#HEAD VOLT ADJUST
PRINTING
Patern Drawing
Check Patern (all color) 5. Check the pattern.
5
Enlarge a single shot line from nozzle row of each color and
check the dots in the line.
If the deviation of each dot in Y direction is within the follow-
ing range, the color (nozzle row) is considered acceptable.
Good example Bad example
“0 ±30 um
Single shot from one

nozzle row
If the deviation is big as shown in “Bad example” in the left fig-
ure, perform the voltage adjustment described below.
6
Acceptable deviation
of each dot in the same
nozzle row:
“0 ±30 um”
0~30um 7
 Work Procedures
6. Select [#ADJUST] -> [HEAD VOLT ADJ].
8
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST
HEAD VOLT ADJ <ent> 7. Select “ADJUST” for [SELECT], and Press [ENTER] key.
#HEAD VOLT ADJUST

SELECT :ADJUST
CHECK

R.2.0 P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > Head Voltage Adjustment
Rev.
4.2.17 Head Voltage Adjustment 2.0
8. Select the nozzle row (color) to be adjusted.

#HEAD VOLT ADJUST Select target nozzle
NZZL SLCT:H1-Odd(C) [] / [] : Select nozzle
H1-Evn(M)
H2-Evn(Y) [ENTER] : Confirm (next)
H2-Odd(K)
H3-Evn(W)
H3-Odd(CL)
#HD OFFSET :[ 0.0]V

start : 0.0V
Enter test start voltage
e.g.: 0.0V
9. Enter the offset voltage used when printing a pattern for adjust-
ment.
1
-3.0~+3.0
(The pattern will look like the image shown in the step 11
below.)
#HD OFFSET :[ 0.0]V Enter test finish voltage
e.g.: 2.0V 1),Set the offset voltage for printing the first pattern.
2
stop : 2.0V
-3.0~+3.0 (-3.0 to +3.0V, increments of 0.1V).
#HD OFFSET :[ 0.0]V Enter step value from test
2),Set the offset voltage for printing the last pattern.
step : 0.2V start to test finish (-3.0 to +3.0V, increments of 0.1V).
e.g.: 0.2V
0.1~1.0
3),Set the voltage added at every step from the above 1) to 2).
3
#HEAD VOLT ADJUST (0.1 to +1.0V, increments of 0.1V)
PRINT START :ent
The entered values are reflected to the reference volt-
HEAD TEMP. CONTROL age of the head.
PLEASE WAIT (A preset offset value will be ignored.)
#HEAD VOLT ADJUST

PRINTING 4
10. Press [ENTER] key to start printing.
Patern Drawing
5
11. Find the optimum offset value.
Enlarge the pattern and find the offset value which presents the
acceptable (within the specified range), smallest deviation in Y
direction.
Test start
6
The acceptable range of deviation is given in the step 5.
7
Test end
Print the patterns from the test start voltage to the test finish volt-
8
age (both set in the step 9) in increments of set step value.
* Numerical values indicate offset values for the head reference
voltage.
12. Set the offset voltage.

Enter the value considered optimum in the step 11.
#HD OFFSET :[ 0.0]V
H1-Odd(C): *.*V
-3.0~+3.0

R.2.0 P.2
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > Shot Count Reset
Rev.
4.2.18 Shot Count Reset 2.0
 Outline
This section describes how to “reset the shot count” and “reset the offset value of the Head driving power voltage” of
selected head.
 Use this menu when you replace the head.
 Work Procedures
1
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [RESET SHOT CNTS].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST
RESET SHOT CNTS<ent>
2
2. Select a head and set whether or not to reset, and then press
#RESET SHOT CNTS ENTER key.
3
HEAD [MCYKW C L ]
[] / [] :Select head
#RESET SHOT CNTS [] / [] :Select whether or not to reset
HEAD [ YKW C L ] Head to be reset: Displayed
Head not reset: Not displayed
[ENTER] : Confirm
[END] : Back
4
3. Determine whether you reset the offset voltage of the head
5
#OFFSET VOLT selected in the Step 2 or not.
INITIAL.OK? <ent>
[ENTER] : Reset it.
[END] : Not reset it.

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > Wash Tube
Rev.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2012.05.31 Revised F/W ver 3.00/3.00 Remark
4.2.19 Wash Tube 1.0
 Outline
After washing the head, run washing liquid through from the air purge port to the head in order to wash ink remaining
in the air purge port.
 Procedure of WASH TUBE

1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [WASH TUBE].
1
<LOCAL>
[FUNCTION]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ENT>
2
#ADJUST
WASH TUBE <ent>
2. Press the ENTER key.
3. Select a path to wash, and press the ENTER key.

#WASH TUBE When you press the ENTER key, the cartridge valve closes.
HEAD [MCYKMMCC]
4. Mount the close cartridge, and attach the washing liquid tube to
3
SET WASH TOOL the air purge port.
COMPLETE :ent When the work has been completed, press the ENTER key.
When you press the ENTER key, the absorption pump operates.
5. The absorption pump operates and it absorbs washing liquid

4
#WASH TUBE from the air purge port. After 40-second absorption, the absorp-
COMPLETE :ent tion pump stops.
(When you press the FUNCTION key, the absorption pump
operates again.)
By pressing the ENTER key, you can proceed to the next step. 5
When you press the FUNCTION key, absorption operation is
performed again.
When you press the ENTER key, the cartridge valve opens.
6. Remove the mounted close cartridge, and remove the washing

6
REMOVE WASH TOOL liquid tube from the air purge port.
COMPLETE :ent When the work has been completed, press the ENTER key.
When you press the ENTER key, the cartridge valve closes.
7. This is the end of washing air purge port.

7
#ADJUST
WASH TUBE <ent>

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > MACHINE NAME(UJF-3042FX)
Rev.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2012.05.31 Revised 2013.02.08 F/W ver 3.50/3.50 Remark
4.2.20 MACHINE NAME(UJF-3042FX) 1.0
 Outline
Switch the model name to UJF-3042FX or UJF-A3FX.
1
 This menu is used when A3FX for China is produced.
 Procedure of WASH TUBE

1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [WASH TUBE].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ENT> 2
#ADJUST
MACHINE NAME <ent>
2. Press the ENTER key.
3
3. Input (confirm) the name.
#MACHINE NAME
Machine Name =3042 [] / []: Change the machine name.
A3 [ENTER]: Finalizes
[END]: End 4

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Mechanical Adjustment
4. Adjustment
4.1 4.2 4.3
4

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Mechanical Adjustment > Adjustment of theTable Flatness
Rev.
4.3.1 Adjustment of theTable Flatness 2.0
 Outline
Adjust the table flatness by adjusting the contacting position between the four Up/Down cams and Rollers under the
table.
3
 Procedures
1. Remove the following covers: (See6.1.1)
Rear Cover TB 1),Rear Cover TB
4
5
2. Raise the table with the up/down key so that LCD indicates
ORIGIN SET UP 50mm for height.
TABLE HEIGHT 25.0
ORIGIN SET UP ORIGIN SET UP

3. Adjust the four points shown in the left figure. 6
300 190 300 00 Move the head with the up, down, right and left keys in
<LOCAL> mode.
Rear (You can start adjustment from any point.)
• The following procedure is shared by four adjusting points. 7

Table
Front
ORIGIN SET UP ORIGIN SET UP

8
00 190 00 00

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > Adjustment of theTable Flatness
Rev.
4.3.1 Adjustment of theTable Flatness 2.0
4. Place the Thickness gauge under the carriage (see the figure).
The Thickness gauge should be placed in the same

position of the carriage, for all the adjusting points.
If it varies, the carriage may be inclined.
1.5mm
Side of UV protection plate

5. Loosen the Fixing screws of the Up/Down cam.
2
(same between right and Loosen the cap bolt located in the side hole of the UV protec-
left sides)
tion plate, inserting a wrench into the hole.
Fixing screws of the

Up/Down Cam
Front 6. Adjust the height.

Adjust the table height so that the gap between the height
adjustment jig placed in the step 4 and carriage is cleared. 4
1), Loosen the red circled Lock Nut and rotate the cap bolt to
move the Up/Down cam back and forth, and fine adjust the
table height.
Up/Down cam  The inclined surface of the Up/Down cam should be

always in contact with the Roller during adjustment.
5
Roller  It is ideal to move the Up/Down cam with your
hands to keep it in absolute contact with the Roller.
Rear
 Be careful not to deform the carriage by excessive
pressure.
6
2),Tighten the Lock Nut when the height is adjusted.
3),Tighten the Fixing screws of the Up/Down cam loosened in
the step 5.
7
4),Confirm that there is no gap between the Up/Down cam and
Up/Down cam Roller.
Roller 7. Adjust all the four points specified in the step 3 following the
above procedure.
8. Reattach the cover.
8

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Mechanical Adjustment > Carriage height Adjustment
Rev.
4.3.2 Carriage height Adjustment 2.0
1
Gap : 1.5mm Gap : 1.5mm
As a precondition for this adjustment, the table flatness should be adjusted correctly. 2
Refer to “4.3.1 Adjustment of theTable Flatness” before checking or performing this adjustment.
3
 Check the Slant of Carriage
1. Raise the table to the highest position.
ORIGIN SET UP
TABLE HEIGHT 50.0
2. Move the Carriage to place of “X=150,Y=150”.

ORIGIN SET UP
150.0 150 4
3. Turn the sub-power switch to OFF then the main power to OFF.
4. Remove the Front cover. (See6.1.1)

5. Measure the gap between the table and the base of the carriage
using a thickness gauge.
5
The measured values at both sides should be within the speci-
fied range.
Measurement point : Right and left sides of the carriage
The rated value : 1.5 ±0.25mm 6
* If the measured value is out of the specified range, adjust the
height of the carriage.
7
The adjustment procedure is given in the following steps.
Measurement point
Gap : 1.5mm
8

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Mechanical Adjustment > Carriage height Adjustment
Rev.
4.3.2 Carriage height Adjustment 2.0
Perform the following steps as follow-ups of the procedure previously described in ”Check the Slant of carriage”.
6. Remove the following covers: (See6.1.1)

1,Head Cover
2,Fitting Cover
7. Loosen the two carriage Fixing screws located at the back of the
carriage. (See left figure) 1
 To loosen the right screw, insert a ballpoint wrench
slightly from an angle and rotate it.
8. Insert a 1.5mm thickness gauge between the upper surface of

2
the table and the base of the carriage, and adjust the gap so that
the right and left sides have the equal height. After that, tighten
the screws that were loosened.
Fxing screws of Carriage
Insert wrench from an angle and rotate.
The measurement point and adjustment value are specified
in the step 5. 3
9. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Mechanical Adjustment > Carriage Front/Rear Tilt Adjustment
Rev.
4.3.3 Carriage Front/Rear Tilt Adjustment 2.0
 Outline 2
The image quality deteriorates when the Carriage is not in parallel to the Table.
In this manual, the condition that the carriage is wholly tilting back and forth to the table is called as “Front/rear tilt”.
The checking procedures and adjusting procedure of “Front/rear tilt” are described as follows:
As a precondition for this adjustment, the table flatness should be adjusted correctly.
3
Refer to “4.3.1 Adjustment of theTable Flatness” before checking or performing this adjustment.
 Check for carriage Tilt
ORIGIN SET UP
1. Raise the table to the highest position. 4
TABLE HEIGHT
2. Move the carriage to place of “X=150,Y=150”.
5
ORIGIN SET UP
150.0 150
6
5. Measure the gap between the table and the base of the carriage
using a thickness gauge.
The measured values at both sides should be within the speci-
fied range.
Measurement point : Right and left sides of the carriage
The rated value : 1.5 ±0.25mm
7
* If the measured value is out of the specified range, loosen the
screws on the side of the carriage and adjust the tilt.
8
Measurement point
Gap : 1.5mm

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Mechanical Adjustment > Carriage Front/Rear Tilt Adjustment
Rev.
4.3.3 Carriage Front/Rear Tilt Adjustment 2.0
Perform the following steps as follow-ups of the procedure previously described in ”Check for carriage Tilt”.
6. Remove the LED-UV Unit. (See6.7.1)
Both side of the carriage 7. Loosen the screws located on the both sides of the carriage.
8. Insert a 1.5mm thickness gauge between the table and carriage

1
and adjust the height so that the right and left sides (near and far
sides) of the carriage have the equal height. After that, tighten
the screws that were loosened.
in the step 5.
2
Fixing screw of the CarriageBase
 Since the carriage is relatively small, you can
check both the near and far sides together by
inserting a long thickness gauge into the far side.
3

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Mechanical Adjustment > LED-UV Unit Height Adjustment
Rev.
4.3.4 LED-UV Unit Height Adjustment 2.0
LED-UV Unit
2
2.0mm
3
 Outline
The up/down position of the LED-UV Unit is mechanically adjusted. The gap between the LED-UV Unit and table is
set to 2mm while the head gap is 1.5mm.
 Check the Height of LED-UV Unit

ORIGIN SET UP
TABLE HEIGHT 50.0 4
2. Move the carriage to place of “X=150,Y=150”.
ORIGIN SET UP
5
150.0 150
6
5. Measure the gap between the LED-UV Unit and table using a
thickness gauge.
Measurement point : One point from center part of the LED-
UV Unit base
The rated value : 2.0 ±0.25mm
* If the measured value is out of the specified range, adjust the

7
height of the LED-UV Unit.
Measurement point
8

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Mechanical Adjustment > LED-UV Unit Height Adjustment
Rev.
4.3.4 LED-UV Unit Height Adjustment 2.0
Perform the following steps as follow-ups of the procedure previously described in”Check the Height of LED-UV
Unit” .
6. Loosen the Fixing screw of LED-UV Unit.

Loosen
7. Adjust the gap between the LED-UV Unit and the upper surface
of the table so that it settles within the specified range. After 1
that, tighten the LED-UV Unit fixing screw.
in the step 5.
2
2.0 mm

Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Mechanical Adjustment > Work Area Sensor Height Adjustment
Rev.
4.3.5 Work Area Sensor Height Adjustment 2.0
2
 Outline
To protect the print head, check if the light axis of the LED transmission sensor is at the specified height, and adjust it
3
if necessary.
The appropriate height of the light axis for this unit is “0.5mm under the head surface”.
 Adjustment standard
1mm thickness gauge
(LCD display: ”Table height 50 ”)
2. Execute [#SENSOR TEST WorkHeight] from [# TEST]. The

4
following results indicate the good condition.
1),Without a light shield: “WorkHeight: ON”
5
2),Place a 1mm thickness gauge on the table to shield the light:
“WorkHeight: OFF”
Sensor rays
Table
 Work Procedures 6
Sensor BKT Height Adjust screw 3. Remove the following covers: (See6.1.1)
1),Right Cover
Lock Nut 2),Left Cover
7
Fxing screw
4. Loosen the Fixing screw of Sensor BKT.
5. Adjust the gap between the overhanging parts of the side panel
10mm Parallel and the Sensor BKT to 10mm, and also arrange those overhang-
ing parts parallel to each other.
Reference point
1),Loosen the Lock Nut of the Height Adjust Screw.
2),Adjust the height by rotating the Height Adjustment screw. 8
3),Tighten the Lock Nut and then tighten the BKT Fixing screw.
The right and left sides (projector and receiver sides) of the
main unit have the same structure. Adjust the both sides at the
same time.
6. Perform the step 1 and 2 to check.

Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items
5. Test
5.1 5.2
5
Test Items Other Test

Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > CHECK PATTERN
Rev.
5.1.1 CHECK PATTERN 2.0
 Outline
Following 12 “CHECK PATTERN” types are printable.
100% 50% 25% 6.25%

NOZZLE V-LINE H-LINE SLANT
GRADATE V-1B1W H-1B1W DROP CHECK*
 List of CHECK PATTERN 1

No Operation Selectable Values / Description
1 Select a pattern Select a desired one among the check patterns listed above.
2
3
Select Y resolution
Select X resolution
300, 600, 900, 1200 dpi
360, 540, 720, 1080, 1440 dpi
2
4 Select scan direction and the number Direction : UNI-D, :BI-D
of divisions. Divisions : 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24, 32 passes
3
5 Select the Linewidth 1~1500dots(Only as for V-LINE and H-LINE and SLANT)
6 Select the interval of the line. 1~9999dots(Only as for V-LINE and H-LINE and SLANT)
7 Select drawing size *2 X: 10 ~ 420 mm
Y: 10 ~ 300 mm
8 Select drawing color MCYKWR
9 Start drawing. [ENTER]: Starts drawing.
[REMOTE]: Selects nozzles and Switches between high speed scanning ON and OFF. 4
10 During drawing. [END]: Stop the drawing.
* Pattern of the [DROP CHECK] dose not heve menu of the [Y resolution]-[Drawing color].

Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > AGEING
Rev.
5.1.2 AGEING 2.0
 Outline
For the durability testing, continuous reciprocating operation is executed.
 List of AGEING items
Name of Test Function

XYZ SERVO*
XY SERVO*
Continuous reciprocating operation in X-axis, Y-axis and Table Up/Down.
Continuous reciprocating operation in X-axis and Y-axis
1
X SERVO Continuous reciprocating operation in X-axis
Y SERVO* Continuous reciprocating operation in Y-axis
PUMP MOTOR
WIPER MOTER
Continuous operation of Ink-supplying Pump Motor (Max.72Hours)
Continuous reciprocating operation of Wiper Motor (Max.9999Times)
2
Z SERVO Continuous reciprocating operation of Table Up/Down.
(This menu can choose the value that is bigger than "speed and acceleration" of XYZ SERVO.)
HEAD WIPE Continuous reciprocating operation of Wiping. (Max.9Times)
CAPPING Continuous reciprocating operation of Capping. 3
CLEANING Execution of cleaning operation by the designated times (Max.500Times)
FLASHING Continuous reciprocating operation of Flashing.
RADIATOR PUMP Continuous operation of the Pump Motor of Water cooling device.
X measure
COM
Continuous operation of the X measure.
For developmental debugging
4
*It may cause ink leakage from the Head when executed in keeping the ink charged.
For the work, put down unused media or the like in advance since it may cause ink leakage when 5
[Y SERVO] or [XYZ SERVO] or [XY SERVO] is executed.

Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > SENSOR TEST
Rev.
5.1.3 SENSOR TEST 2.0
 Outline
Each sensor is tested.
 List of SENSOR TEST
Name of Test Function LCD display

Cover Displaying the status of the Cover Sensor.
(The identification by the cover name is not possible. Because
OPEN/CLOSE
1
each cover sensor for series connection.)
Y -Org Displaying the status of the Y-origin Sensor. ON/OFF
X -Org Displaying the status of the X-origin Sensor . ON/OFF
Z-Org
Wiper-Org
Displaying the status of the Z-origin Sensor (Table).
Displaying the status of the Wiper Origin Sensor.
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
2
WorkHeight Displaying the status of the WorkHeight Limit Sensor. ON/OFF
InkCtrg 1 Displaying the status of the Ink Cartridge1 Sensor. ON/OFF
InkCtrg 2
InkCtrg 3
Displaying the status of the Ink Cartridge2 Sensor.
Displaying the status of the Ink Cartridge3 Sensor.
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
3
InkCtrg 4 Displaying the status of the Ink Cartridge4Sensor. ON/OFF
4
InkNear 1 Displaying the status of the Ink Near End Sensor.(color 1) OK/NEND
5
CoolFloat Displaying the status of the Float Sensor of water cooling device. ON/OFF

Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > PARAM. DRAW
Rev.
5.1.4 PARAM. DRAW 2.0
 Outline
Select a parameter, and draw the settings. The selectable parameters are as follows:
 List of PARAM. DRAW
No. PARAMETER
1
2
SYSTEM PRM
MAINTE PRM
1
3 SERVO PRM
4 FEED PRM.2
5
6
HEAD PRM
INK PRM.1
2
7 INK PRM.2
8 SCAN PRM
3
9 WAVE PRM 1 (There is color choice.)
10 WAVE PRM 2 (There is color choice.)
11 WAVE PRM 3(There is color choice.)

12 WAVE PRM 4(There is color choice.)
 For the details of parameters, refer to “4.1.4 Parameter functions” of “SERVICE DOCUMENTS”.
4

Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > MEMORY CHECK
Rev.
5.1.5 MEMORY CHECK 2.0
 Outline
Checks each memory of the machine.
 Content
Item Content
F-ROM check Executes hash check of F-ROM.
 When a check sum error occurs, “F-ROM SUM ERROR” is displayed.
1
S-RAM check Executes Read/Write check of S-RAM.
 When a DATA error occurs, “S-RAM D:xxxxxxxx” is displayed.
 When a Address error occurs, “S-RAM A:xxxxxxxx” is displayed.
SDRAM check Executes Read/Write check of SDRAM.
 When a DATA error occurs, “SDRAM D:xxxxxxxx” is displayed.
 When a Address error occurs, “SDRAM A:xxxxxxxx” is displayed.
2

Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > Key Board Test
Rev.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / Remark
5.1.6 Key Board Test 2.0
 Outline
Tests the panel switch.
 Content
When the panel switch is pressed, the name of the switch is displayed on the LCD.
1
If none is pressed, “NONE” is displayed on the LCD.
When you press the [END] key, “Test end” is displayed and the keyboard test is completed.

Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > LCD Test
Rev.
5.1.7 LCD Test 2.0
 Outline
The characters are displayed on the LCD.
 Content
After LCD test starts, each character will be displayed repeatedly on the LCD.
1
When you press the [END] key, the LCD test is completed.

Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > Temperature Check
Rev.
5.1.8 Temperature Check 2.0
 Outline
Temperature check of each part that monitors temperature is available.
 Content
The temperature in the table below is displayed.
Display
HT SINK Heat sink temperature of slider relay PCB
Content
1
HEAD1 Head temperature of head 1 EVEN side
HEAD2 Head temperature of head 1 ODD side
HEAD3
HEAD4
Head temperature of head 2 EVEN side
Head temperature of head 2 ODD side
2
HEAD5 Head temperature of head 3 EVEN side
HEAD6 Head temperature of head 3 ODD side
HEAD7
HEAD8
Not Use
Not Use
3
LED UV1 Temperature of UVLED PCB 1
LED UV2 Temperature of UVLED PCB 2
4
LED UV3 Temperature of LED UV DRIVE PCB
RADIATER Not Use
HD BASE2 Not Use
HD BASE Not Use
5
LCD Temperature of Key Board PCB

Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > UV LEVEL Check
Rev.
5.1.9 UV LEVEL Check 2.1
 Outline
Operates for measuring the amount of light of LED-UV.
 Content
Wear protective eyewear to prevent injury to your eyes.

1
1 Align the sensor part of the light checker installed on the measurement jig with the mark on the back right side of
the table.
Sensor part Take care to prevent misalignment of the 2

position in the X direction, and upward
movement of the sensor and jig.
3
2 Set the range of the UV light checker to "H".
3 Set the mode to "DHMAX".
Press the button on the left side several

times until the display on the LCD screen
4
says "DHMAX". Set to "H".
4 In JOG mode, set the height of the table to 41.7 mm. 6

5 Press the [ENTER] key to exit JOG mode.
6 From the [FUNCTION] menu, select [MAINTENANCE] -> [UV LAMP] -> [CHECK UV LEVEL].
7 Point: Select 1, and then press the [ENTER] key.
8 Move the slider back and forth 3 times or more.
9 During UV irradiation, confirm that the cooling fan on the front of the UV lamp unit runs.
7
10Press the END key to return the slider to the station.
11Confirm the measured value on the light checker.
12If the measured value is less than 400 mW, confirm the position of the sensor for the light checker and the height of
the UV unit, and then perform the measurement again. 8
13Disengage the MAX hold on the UV light checker, and return the display on the UV light checker to 0.
14Point: Always use Steps 7 through 11, in order, to measure 2 through 8.
15Point: Select ALL = all lamps on for 3 minutes. Confirm that no errors occur and that there are no problems.
16Press the[ END] key several times to exit brightness measurement.

Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > INK IC Check
Rev.
5.1.10 INK IC Check 2.0
 Outline
Check the ink cartridge IC.
 Content
Check is performed by reading the IC chip data, and then displays the number of errors for each cartridge.
1
When an error occurs, “IC=1 ERR=1” is displayed.

Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > INK TEST
Rev.
5.1.11 INK TEST 2.0
 Outline
This is a function to adjust the wave shape. Discharges by changing the wave shape and the voltage, and searches the
proper wave shape.
 Content
Draws by changing one value of the specified wave shape parameter little by little.
For drawing, you can specify either of test drawing, 1B15W, density 6.25% or density 100%.
1
You can also perform cleaning before drawing.

Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > ENCORDER Check
Rev.
5.1.12 ENCORDER Check 2.0
 Outline
Checks the operation of the linear encoder and the motor encoder by moving the slider.
 Content
“M: xxx E: xxx” is displayed on the lower row of the LCD. The coordinate value of the motor encoder is displayed in
M, and that of the linear encoder is displayed in E in units of mm.
With[] []key, you can move the slider to right and left.
1

Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > EVENT LOG
Rev.
5.1.13 EVENT LOG 2.0
 Outline
Displays the event log.
 Content
Displays the latest event log from the beginning in order.
1
You can change logs with [] []key and display the details with the [TEST] key.
When the [DATACLEAR] key is pressed, the event log is initialized.

Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > Message Check
Rev.
5.1.14 Message Check 2.0
 Outline
Error messages and warning messages are displayed.
 Content
You can display error messages and warning messages with [] [] key in order.

Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > HW Test
Rev.
5.1.15 HW Test 2.0
 Outline
Port test of the hardware
 Content
As this is a function for development, the details are not disclosed.

Maintenance Manual > Test > Other Test
5. Test
5.1 5.2
5
Test Items Other Test

Maintenance Manual > Test > Other Test > Ink route leak confirmation procedure
Rev.
5.2.1 Ink route leak confirmation procedure 2.0
 Outline
This chapter explains ink route leak confirmation procedure after replacing the dumper adapter and the dumper.
In addition, perform this before attaching ink tube from the cartridge with the dumper port.
 Confirmation procedure
1
1. Connect two dumper ports by the tube 2.5mm in inside diame-
Port Tube(Single Black)
SJ-MMK 2.5 x 4.5 ter.
2
Dumper
2. Remove the Station Cover.

(Make the port for checking negative pressure usable.)
• Fixing screw x2
3
Station Cover
Head1 Head2 Head3

4
Port for checking negative pressure

5
3. Attach the Leak Checking jig (Syringe) with the port for check-
Tube
Inside 2.5mm ing negative pressure.
Dumper
Dumper
 Do not press the piston of the syringe.
It may absorb foreign object into the nozzle and
6
Air drain Adupter cause discharging defect.
port
Air drain port
4. Check the “Leak”.
Head
Leak Cheking jig
• Pull the Piston of syrige.
Criteria
7
Cap
OK: When you pull the piston of the syringe, you feel load, and
if you loose the power to pull, it tries to return backward.
Syringe
(There is no leak of air and when you pull the piston, the
8
Tube
pump route becomes in the vacuum status.)
Port for checking negative pressure
NG: If you can pull the piston of the syringe easily, or even if
you loose the power to pull, it does not return backward.
(There is any leak of air somewhere in the route and air
has entered in the syringe.)

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Covers
6. Disassembly and Reassembly

6.1 6.2 6.3
6
Covers Ink-related Parts Driving Parts
6.4 6.5 6.6
PCBs Sensors Other Electrical Parts
6.7 6.8 7
UV Parts Greasing

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Covers > Cover Layout
Rev.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver --- Remark
6.1.1 Cover Layout 2.0
 Front
Cartrige Cover
Left Cover Head Cover

1
Slider PCB Cover
Upper Cover
Right Cover
Front Cover
2
Front-Left Cover
Front Cover
Under-TB Front Cover TB
Side Cover
(Right and left are common) Station Cover Wast ink Tank Door
4
 Rear
5
Rear Cover
Rear Left Cover
Rear Right Cover

6
Rear Cover TB
Power Supply Chassis

Rear Panel

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Covers > Key Panel Assy
Rev.
6.1.2 Key Panel Assy 2.0
2
Key Panel Assy.
To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.

3
 Procedures
4
1. Turn the main power OFF
2. Remove the following covers:

• Key Board Cover -Under
5
The state that excluded Key
Board Cover-Under
6
Disconnect the FFC
3. Disconnect the FFC from the Key Board PCB.
 When the FFC is connected, be sure not to mistake

the frond and back.
 Do not connect it at an angle.
7
Key Board PCB

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Covers > Key Panel Assy
Rev.
6.1.2 Key Panel Assy 2.0
Power Switch Relay Connector 4. Disconnect the following Connecters.

1),Power Switch Relay Connector
2),Emergency Switch Relay Connector
1
Emergency Switch Relay Connector
Remove the Side Cover of right and left. 5. Remove the Side Cover of right and left.
6. Remove the Key Panel Assy. (Four Screws)

Screw : P4x8SMW x4
2
 The following process may be required at maintenance such as parts replacement. 5

7. Remove the Front Panel. (Five Screws)
Front Panel

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Covers > “Tube_FFC Holder” Stick the Protection tape
Rev.
6.1.3 “Tube_FFC Holder” Stick the Protection tape 2.0
1
Lower part of the Slider PCB BKT Tube_FFC Holder On the Bear Guide
To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF. 2

 Outline
FFC connected with the slider PCB is fixed with “Tube_FFC Holder” (at two positions). By the screw coming out
from this plate may damage FFC. 3
To prevent this, or as the countermeasure to prevent it from recurring after a problem occurred, paste protection tape
on this plate.
4
 Procedures

• Upper Cover
5
• Rear Cover
• Slider PCB Cover
Refer to “ 6.1.1 Cover Layout ”
 Explanation of Slider PCB BKT part

6
3. Remove the Bear Fixing BKT.
• Fixing Screw x2
7
Bear Fixing BKT
Fixing Screw 8

Rev.
Tube_FFC Holder 4. Remove the “Tube_FFC Holder”.

• Fixing Screw x2
1
Fixing Screw
5. Stick the Protection tape on the “Tube_FFC Holder”.

2
• Recommended tape: Acetate fiber tape of 40mm width
 Method and note for pasting tape are as below:
Do not seal holes. 3
Protection tape
Paste tape so that

4
the screw to fix the
tube holder (TM-
04) can be screened
out.
Tape width: 40mm

5
6. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.
 Explanation of bear guide part 6

7. Remove the Bear Fixing BKT.
• Fixing Screw x2
Bear Fixing BKT 8

Rev.
8. Take the Ink Tubes off from the “Tube_FFC Holder”
9. Remove the “Tube_FFC Holder”.

• Fixing Screw x2
2
Tube_FFC Holder
10. Stick the Protection tape on the “Tube_FFC Holder”.

• Recommended tape: Acetate fiber tape of 40mm width
3
 Method and note for pasting tape are as below:
Do not seal holes.
4
Protection tape
Paste tape so that

the screw to fix the
5
tube holder (TM-
04) can be screened
out.
Tape width: 40mm
11. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly. 6

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts

6.1 6.2 6.3
6
6.4 6.5 6.6
6.7 6.8 7
UV Parts Greasing

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Head Assy
Rev.
6.2.1 Head Assy 2.0
 Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.Ink may get in
your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you touch the ink.
 Never rotate the screws which are not instructed to do so in the following procedure.
1
Head adjustment is not required when the Head is disassembled or assembled at the user
side.Never rotate the hexagon socket head screws (cap screws) specified in the following figure,
which are used for adjustment or attachment.
Front-back set
screw
Inclination set
2
screw
3
Front-back set
screw
Adjusting
screw
 Procedures of Head Washing before Replacing the Head

Before replacing the head, wash the new Head Assy washed with acetone with F-200 Cleaning Liquid. Washing pro-
4
cess is described first.
Be sure to perform the washing process as below.

 Filling ink without washing may cause the nozzle clogging or deflection.
 After washing, be sure to fill ink in 24 hours.
5
1. Set the Filter to the Dumper Adapter of the Head Assy.
50cc syringe Filter : Millex SLLHH25NS (MILLIPORE)
F-200 Clearning
6
liquid
2. Remove the cap of the Air Bleeder Tube.
3. Set the syringe containing F-200 Cleaning Liquid to the Filter,

Filter and then fill the cleaning liquid until about 10 cc of the liquid
0.45um 25mm
discharges from the Air Bleeder Tube.
Head Assy
Dumper Adapter
Remove the
cap
Never pull the piston of the syringe.
7
Foreign material may be sucked into the noz-
zle.
Waste liq-
uid
8
Head
Air Bleeder
Tube
Waste liquid

Rev.
6.2.1 Head Assy 2.0
4. Close the cap of the Air Bleeder Tube.

F-200 Clearning
5. Push the syringe to discharge 30 cc of F-200 Cleaning Liquid

liquid
from the nozzles.
Filter
0.45um 25mm
Check F-200 Cleaning Liquid squirts out of all
Dumper Adapter
the nozzles.
1
close the cap

2
F-200 Clearning
Head
liquid
3
Drain cleaning
liqiud from
Waste liquid Nozle
6. Remove the cap of the Air Bleeder Tube.
7. Set the syringe filled with air to the Filter, and then inject the
air.
4
Air
Filter Remaining F-200 Cleaning Liquid is discharged from the Air

0.45um 25mm
Bleeder Tube.
Remove the
cap 8. After discharging all F-200 Cleaning Liquid, inject another 60
5
Dumper Adapter cc air. (The Cleaning Liquid is discharged from the Air Bleeder
Tube.)
Never pull the piston of the syringe.

Foreign material may be sucked into the noz-
Waste liq- zle.
6
uid
Head 9. Close the cap of the Air Bleeder Tube, and remove the Filter.
10. Perform Step 1 to 9 to the other nozzle row.

Waste liquid
After washing, be sure to fill ink in 24 hours. 7

• Note: If needed, remove the “GEN Head Holder” before
Two screws working.
GEN Head Holder

Rev.
6.2.1 Head Assy 2.0
 Procedures of Disassembly and Reassembly
Dumper &
Screw
Dumper Cover
2. Disconnect the FPCof the Print Head from the Head Slider
PCB.
3. Remome the screw of Dumper Cover.

Screw : P3x6SMW x1 1
4. Remome the Dumper & Dumper Cover.
As shown in the lower right figure, the Dumper Cover is
attached by inserting the tab. Tilt and remove the tab with care
Tab
not to damage the Dumber or Tube.
2
Air Bleeder Tube
5. Remome the Air Bleeder Tube.
1), Remome the screw of Fitting Cover.
Air Bleeder BKT

Screw : B3x6 x1
2)Loosen the nut on the back of the Air Bleeder BKT (lower
3
right figure) and remove the Tube.
Fitting Cover 4
5
Nut
6. Remove the two screws that fix the Head.

Head fixing screw
6
Use a slotted screwdriver.
7. Remove the Head Assy.

GEN Head (with the GEN Head Holder (metal plate) attached)
Holder
7
Head Assy

Rev.
6.2.1 Head Assy 2.0
8. Remove the GEN Head Holder (imetal plate) from the Head
Assy.
Screw : B3x6 x2
Head Assy GEN Head Holder 2


Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Dumper
Rev.
6.2.2 Dumper 2.0
 Procedures
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.

 Be sure to start the work after confirming the working process.

(Refer to “3.1.2 Replacement of Dumper”)
1
 Spread the media or the like around the Carriage not to soil the surroundings.
1. Turn the main power OFF.
2
Tube
Cap Nut 2. Remove the Head FPC of the target Head from the Slider PCB.
3. Remove the Cap Nut, and pull of the Ink Tube.
3
Dumper
Take care not to stain any object by ink dripping.
O Ring
4
Dumper Cover
5
4. Remome the screw of Dumper Cover.
Dumper &
Dumper Cover Screw : P3x6SMW x1
6
5. Remome the Dumper & Dumper Cover.
As shown in the lower right figure, the Dumper Cover is
attached by inserting the tab. Tilt and remove the tab with care
not to damage the Dumber or Tube.
8
Tab

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Dumper
Rev.
6.2.2 Dumper 2.0
6. Take out the Dumper from the Dumper Cover.

Dumper Cover
 Do not press the film or round button of the

Dumper.
Dumper
It may cause ink dripping.
button 1
2
film

3

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Pump Head
Rev.
6.2.3 Pump Head 2.0
 Removing Procedure of Pump Head

touch the ink.
 Wipe the blue cover of Pump Head with a dry cloth for cleaning.
Never use any chemicals such as alcohol, remover or the like since it may result in cracks or surface 1
separations of cover.

(Refer to “3.1.3 Replacement of Pump Head”) 2
 Take care not soil the surroundings.
3
1. Confirm the pump position to be replaced.
The pump No. is identical with the Head No.

Take care not to confuse it.
ÇP 2 3
 Perform the following process with the removed 4
Station Assy upside down.
Station Assy
Nut
2. Remove the Nut and Sleeve from each of the right and left
tubes. 5
Sleeve Take care not to stain any object by ink dripping.
3. Remove the Pump head.

7
(1) Remove the Pump base.
Screw x4
8
(2) Remove the Pump head from the Pump base.
Pump base
Pump head

Rev.
6.2.3 Pump Head 2.0
 Tube replacing/Pump head assembling procedure

4. Pull the catch part of Pump Cover frontward to remove the
Pump Cover.
5. After the replacement of Pump Tube, put the tube between roll-
2
Pump Tube ers in parallel, and insert the Pump Roller into the main unit.
 Apply the silicon grease, which is included in the
3
Maintenance Tube Set, to the Pump Roller and
Pump Tube. (approx. half a bag for one pump)
4
6. Assemble the pump cover.
In the following case, the assembling is not accepted.

 The hook of Pump Cover is not firmly engaged
with the base. 5
7. Perform Pump tube aging. 7

Rotate the pump with an electric screwdriver for one minute
and more.
 Be sure to perform this before attaching.

Otherwise, it may cause power swing of the
8
pump motor or abnormal noise.
8. Attach the pump head to the station Assy.

Attach it in the reverse procedures of the Step 3.

Rev.
6.2.3 Pump Head 2.0
9. Assemble the Nut and Sleeve to the right and left tube.
Nut
Sleeve

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Station Assy.
Rev.
6.2.4 Station Assy. 2.0
 Description of this section

This section provides the procedure for removing the unit for easier maintenance of certain parts, such as the Pump
Head and Wiper Assy.
1
 Spread the media or the like around the Carriage not to soil the surroundings.
 Procedures 2
1. Move the Y-Bar to the farthest position.

• Front Cover •Rear Cover-Right •Station Cover
3
4. Open the Waste Ink Tank Door and remove the Waste Ink Tank.
4
5. Move the Carriage to the far left.
Waste Ink Tank
6. Disconnect the relay connector of the Diaphragm Pump.
7. Disconnect the black tube of the Nozzle Suction Bottle.

Tube
5
 Take care not to stain any object by ink dripping
6
Connecter
8. Disconnect the connecter from the Wiper Motor.
7
9. Disconnect the connector of the Pump Motor.
( 3042 Pump3 PCB [CN10] )
Connector of the 10. Disconnect the connecter of the Wiper Sensor.

Pump Motor
( 3042 Pump3 PCB [CN5] )
Connecter of the Wiper

Sensor Wiper Motor

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Station Assy.
Rev.
6.2.4 Station Assy. 2.0
11. Remove the three screws.

Screw : P4x8SMW x3
12. Remove the Station Assy.

Carefully remove the Assy so as not to damage the cables or 2
tubes.
In order to protect the underside parts, place the
3
removed Station Assy on a thick material as shown
in the below figure, keeping its underside untouched
partially.

5

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Wipe Suction Pump Assy.
Rev.
6.2.5 Wipe Suction Pump Assy. 2.0
Wipe Suction Pump Assy.
2
 Procedures


3
• Rear panel
4
3. Open the Waste Ink Tank Door and disconnect the relay con-
nector.
5
4. Disconnect the Tube and remove the Wipe Suction Pump Assy.
Disconnect the Tube Screw : P3x8SMW x4
7

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Cartridge Guide Assy.
Rev.
6.2.6 Cartridge Guide Assy. 2.0
 Procedures


(Refer to “3.1.4 Replacement of Cartridge Guide Assy.”) 1

2
Numbers indicate the color order
2
1
2. Remove the Cartridge Cover and the Rear Cover.
3 4 3. Check the slots.
The Cartridge Guide Assy consists of two groups of

3
5 6
cartridge guides, and each group contains three car-
tridge guides arranged one on top of the other.
Assembly/disassembly is performed by group. Check
Group 1 Group 2 the position of the target cartridge before disassem-
bling.
2 1 4. Disconnect all connectors(cable) from the ID Contact PCB. 4

4 3
6 5 5
ID Contact PCB (x6)
5. Remove the Cartridge Sensor Assy from the Slider Relay PCB,
and draw the cable to the back of the Cartridge Guide Assy. 6
See the following table for connector numbers and cartridge
numbers of the Slider Relay PCB board.
CN No.
CN10
Cartridge No.
Cartridge 1
7
CN11 Cartridge 2
CN12 Cartridge 3
Cartridge sensor
CN14 Cartridge 4
8
Assy CN15 Cartridge 5
CN16 Cartridge 6

Rev.
6. Remove the Cap Nut, and pull of the Ink Tube..
 Take care not to stain any object by ink dripping

and also not to lose the O-ring.
1
7. Remove the Ink Slot Guide GASS(steel plate).
Screw : P3x6SMW x3
Important notes for the following steps 8 to 11.

2
3
The red circles in the above figure indicate the fitting
4
positions of the resin ribs from the Cartridge Guide
and the plate. Be careful not to break the ribs.
8. Remove the two screws that fix the Ink Slot Guide BKT1(steel
Screw(x2)
plate).
9. Remove the Cartridge Guide(Group1).

The Ink Slot Guide BKT1(steel plate) should be kept attached. 5
Ink Slot Guide

BKT1
Cartridge
Guide(Group1) 6
10. Remove the two screws that fix the Ink Slot Guide BKT2(steel
Screw(x2)
plate).
11. Remove the Cartridge Guide(Group2).

The Ink Slot Guide BKT2(steel plate) should be kept attached. 7
8
Ink Slot Guide Cartridge
BKT2 Guide(Group2)

Rev.
12. Remove the Cartridge Base Assy from the Ink Slot Guide
BKT1(or Ink Slot Guide BKT2).
Cartridge Base Assy
13. Remove the Cartridge Guide Assy. 2
3
Cartridge Guide Assy.
14. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure. 4

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Cartridge Coupling Assy.
Rev.
6.2.7 Cartridge Coupling Assy. 2.0
 Procedures
Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.Ink may get in your
eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you touch the ink.

1
(Refer to “3.1.5 Replacement of Cartridge Coupling Assy.”)
1. Remove the Cap Nut, and pull of the Ink Tube. 2

Take care not to stain any object by ink dripping and
also not to lose the O-ring.
3
Cap Nut
O-ring (S4) 4
Ink Tube
2. Remove the nut and the fixing screws, and remove the Car-
tridge Coupling Assy..
5
7
Nut (M3)

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Capping
Rev.
6.2.8 Capping 2.0
1
Cap Assy
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.

 Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
2
touch the ink.
3
 Working Procedure
 Method to remove cap by unit

4
• Front Cover
• Upper Cover
5
Cap Assy
3. Pull out the tube from the cap from the fitting.
Tube from cap

7
4. Take Cap Base off.
8
• Screw x4
Cap Base

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Capping
Rev.
6.2.8 Capping 2.0
5. Remove the Cap Slider.

(1) Remove the Cap Slider from the guide flute by extending
the side surface of the Cap Base.
(2) Take two springs off.
Cap Slider
1
 Method to disassemble by units of part such as cap rubber
3
1. Pull out the tube from the cap from the fitting.
5
Tube from cap
Cap Cover 2. Remove the Cap Cover.
6
• Screw x5
7
Cap Rubber
3. Perform maintenance on each part and replace it.
Cap spring

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Wiper unit Assy(Belt, Sensor)
Rev.
6.2.9 Wiper unit Assy(Belt, Sensor) 2.0
1
Wiper Unit Assy
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF. 2

 Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
touch the ink.

3
4
Station Assy
2. Take the Station Assy off, from the machine.
• Refer to 6.2.4 Station Assy.
3. Take the Wiper unit Assy off, from the Station Assy.
7
Wiper unit Assy

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Wiper unit Assy(Belt, Sensor)
Rev.
6.2.9 Wiper unit Assy(Belt, Sensor) 2.0
Wiper Cover
4. Remove the following parts:
• Wiper Cover
• Wiper BKT 2
Wiper BKT 2
1
5. Take the Belt pulley off. (with the nozzle Assy fixed)
• Remove the E-Ring.
2
E-Ring
3
6. Take the Nozzle Assy off.

5
• Remove the Belt holder.
6
Belt holder
7. Take the Wipaer Origin Sensor off. 7

8
Wiper Origin Sensor

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts

6.1 6.2 6.3
6
6.4 6.5 6.6
6.7 6.8 7
UV Parts Greasing

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > X-axis Motor Assy
Rev.
6.3.1 X-axis Motor Assy 2.0
X-axis Motor Assy
2
3
 Procedures
2. Raise the Table to the highest position and then remove it.
Refer to “6.3.3 Table” for removing method. 4
3. Remove the Key Panel Assy.
Refer to ” 6.1.2 Key Panel Assy “ for removing method.
5
4. Loosen the two fixing screws of the coupling of the worm gear
fixing screws of the coupling
side.
 Screws of X motor side is fixed with the Screw 6

adhesive , it cannot be removed.
7
5. Remove the four cap screws that fix the X Motor BKT.
cap screw x4

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > X-axis Motor Assy
Rev.
6.3.1 X-axis Motor Assy 2.0
Encoder Connector
L
6. Disconnect the Encoder Connector and relay connector, and
then take out the motor.
Remove the motor, taking care not to drop it.
1
relay connector
*Disassembling shall be up to the status in the left figure.

coupling X Motor
2
• As the fixing screw of the coupling to the X motor shaft is
locked, it cannot be removed. Therefore, you cannot remove
the X motor BKT.
 Maintenance parts for replacing the X motor is

provided in the Assy indicated in the left figure.
3
X Motor BKT

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Y-axis Motor
Rev.
6.3.2 Y-axis Motor 2.0
1
Y-axis Motor
2
 Procedures

3
1. Remove the Left Cover .

4
Loosen (Four screws)
2. Disconnect the two relay connectors of the motor.
3. Loosen the four screws specified in the figure.
5
Y-Motor BKT
4. Loosen the belt tension.
1) Press the Y Motor BKT in the direction of the arrow until the
6
belt is well loosened.
2) Tighten the four screws previously loosened.
Tighten securely to prevent the Y Motor BKT from moving
back by spring tension.
Press
7
Two Screws 5. Remove the YM Top BKT.(Do not remove the bearing.)
Screw : P4x10SMW x2
YM Top BKT

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Y-axis Motor
Rev.
6.3.2 Y-axis Motor 2.0
6. Remove the Y Motor Assy from the Y-Motor BKT.

Two Screws Screw : P4x10SMW x2
7. Loosen a Hexagon Socket Head Screw then remove the pulley 3

from the motor.
4
Pay attention to missing of the screw.
Pulley
5
Hexagon Socket Head Screw

Bad
Example: Put the belt on the center of both pulleys in parallel.
6
Belt tilted. (Acceptable on the upper)
Bad
7
Example:
Belt biased to either upper
or lower.
Good
Example:
Put it on the pulley center in
parallel. 8

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Table
Rev.
6.3.3 Table 2.0
Table
 Procedures 3
1. Make a printer the next state. 4

1), Move the Y-Bar to the farthest position.
2), Move the Carriage to the capping position.
3), Raise the Table to the highest position.
2. Turn the main power OFF. 5

Rear Cover-TB 3. Remove the following covers.
• Front Cover
•Rear Cover-TB (See left figure)
6
Screw two positions
Rear side of machine
Relay connector of the Suction fan Assy 4. Disconnect the relay connector of the Suction fan Assy . 7

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Table
Rev.
6.3.3 Table 2.0
Lift straight up 5. Open the Front Cover-TB.(Pull the cover toward you.)
6. Lift and remove the Table.
 Hold both sides of the Table and lift it straight up.

If not, the parts specified in the following figure
may be damaged
Front Cover-TB
Table Guide mechanism 2


Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Z-Driving Screw
Rev.
6.3.4 Z-Driving Screw 2.0
 Procedures
1
(Refer to “3.2.1 Replacement of Z-Driving Screw”)
Front Cover-Under TB 1. Remove the following covers:

2
Z-Motor-Reinforce Plate
• Front Cover-Under TB
(The Front Cover-TB can be kept attached.)
3
• Z-Motor-Reinforce Plate
4
Z-Driving Screw Front-Cover-TB
E Ring 2. Remove the E Ring attached to the far side of the Z-Driving
Screw.
Notes for removing E Ring. 5

1. Remove two screws that fix the Z-Driving
Base.
2. Pull the Z-Driving Base.
6
By this, gap is created between the E Ring and Bear-
ing, and this will allow you to remove the E Ring
easily.
Z-Driviing Base E Ring & Bearing
Pull toward you

8

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Z-Driving Screw
Rev.
6.3.4 Z-Driving Screw 2.0
3. Remove the Z Motor BKT.

The Z Motor and Pulley can be kept attached.
1
Z MotorBKT Z Motor
4. Remove the Z-Driving Screw.

Rotate the Z-Driving Screw counterclockwise until it comes
off. 2
3
Z-Driving Screw
Bearing E Ring
5. Remove the parts shown in the left figure from the Z-Driving
Screw. 4
5
Pulley
Cap screw

6
Grease the thread part when attaching a new Z-Driv-
ing Screw.
Grease used: [FLOIL]

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Slider Relay Cooling Fan Assy
Rev.
6.3.5 Slider Relay Cooling Fan Assy 2.0
1
Slider Relay Cooling Fan Assy
2
 Procedures

CN24
2. Remove the Rear Cover.

4
3. Disconnect the Connecter from the Slider Relay PCB Assy.
[CN24]
5
4. Remove the Slider Relay Coolig Fan Assy.
Screw : CS3x20 x2
6
Slider Relay Cooling Fan Assy

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Mist Suction Fan Assy
Rev.
6.3.6 Mist Suction Fan Assy 2.0
Mist Suction Fan Assy 2

3
 Procedure
Relay connector 1. Turn the main power OFF.
2. Remove the following covers: 4

• Front Cover
• Upper Cover
3. Disconnect the relay connector shown in the left figure. 5

Slider PCB
Mist Suction Fan Assy 4. Remove the Mist Suction Fan Assy.
6
Screw : P3x35SMW x4

8
 When assembling, pass wiring of the fan under the
ink tube and be careful about wiring not coming
out.

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Tabel Absorption Fan
Rev.
6.3.7 Tabel Absorption Fan 2.0
 Procedure
1
(Refer to “3.2.2 Replacement of Tabel Absorption Fan”)
Table backside
1. Remove the Table and reverse it.
(Refer to“6.3.3 Table” for removing method.)
2
Table Absorption Fan Assy 4

Remove the Cable saddle 2. Remove the Cable saddle.
Screw : P3x10SMW x2
5
3. Remove the Fan Motor.
Screw : CS4x40 x2
6
Fan Motor

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Linear Encorder Scale
Rev.
6.3.8 Linear Encorder Scale 2.0
Linear Encoder Scale
Scale hook 1. Turn the main power OFF 3

2. Remove the Front Cover.
3. Take the Scale hook off.
4
• Remove the spring(Scale SP).
Spring(Scale SP)
4. Remove the attachment on the right side (scale holder R).

5
5. Remove the Scale hook from the Linear Encorder Scale.
7
Remove the screws.
• Remove the two screws.
8
It is sandwiched between plates.

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > X Gear Box
Rev.
6.3.9 X Gear Box 2.0
 Procedures
1
2. Down the table to the lowest position and turn the power OFF.
3. Remove the front cover.
2
4. Remove the LED UV UNIT.
Refer to “6.7.1 LED UV UNIT” for removing method.
5. Remove the table.

Refer to “6.3.3 Table” for removing method.
X slider
6. Remove the screws (P4x12SMW) fixing the X slider and X
coupling block.
3
X joint block
7. Remove the X joint block from the timing belt. Use a sound
wave type belt tension gauge to measure and record the tension 5
of the timing belt.
[Tension gauge setting values]
• Unit weight: 1.3g/mm width x m length
• Belt width: 20mm
• Span length: 615mm 6
Measure the belt tension at the center along the
length of the belt.
8. Pull the Y bar forward, and then remove the back cover under
7
Back cover TB TB, back cover TB, and PCB cover from the rear of the
machine. (P3×8SMW: 8 locations)
PCB cover
8
Back cover under TB

Rev.
9. Remove the FFC from the Station III PCB, and remove the
Station III PCB clamp on the FFC.
10. Remove the 4 screws (P4x10SMW) from the base BKT

PCB BKT
1
FFC
11. Remove the 2 screws (CS3x40) from the X-T pulley, and
2
X-T pulley
remove the X-T pulley.
12. Remove the 5 screws (CS3x25) fixing the X gearbox Assy.

4
13. Lift the X gearbox Assy, and disconnect the relay connector and
encoder connector connected to the X motor. 6
Relay connector
Encoder connector
7
X motor

Rev.
14. Remove the X gearbox Assy.

Z slide BKTF When passing the X gearbox Assy below the Z slide BKTF, use
the available space to tilt the X gearbox Assy as needed.
2
15. Perform steps 1 through 14 in reverse to install the replacement
X gearbox Assy.
16. At this time, adjust the tension of the timing belt to the tension
before replacement ±10N. (Tightening the adjustment screw on
the X-T pulley will increase the tension.)
Measure the belt tension at the center along the

3
length of the belt.
17. Turn the power ON.

4
18. Use the JOG key to move the Y bar forward/back, to confirm
that it moves correctly with no abnormal noise.
19. Perform FEED COMP 2. 5

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Motor Coupling
Rev.
6.3.10 Motor Coupling 2.0
Applicable scope:
M013772_X gearbox Assy II (UJF-3042-FX #1191 or later)
The coupling for the previous type, M009998_X gearbox Assy cannot be replaced.
1
 Procedures
1. Remove the X gear box Assy.
Refer to ("6.3.9 X Gear Box") for the removal procedure.
3
2. Loosen the clamp bolt on the coupling, and remove the screws
(CS4x8 SMW) on the X motor BKT.
Remove the X motor, X motor BKT, and coupling from the X
gearbox Assy. 4
Coupling
Do not remove the clamp bolt from the coupling.
3. Replace the coupling.

5
7
X motor BKT

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Motor Coupling
Rev.
6.3.10 Motor Coupling 2.0
4. Temporarily tighten the screws (CS4x8 SMW) removed in Step

2.
Position the motor on top, and the X gearbox Assy vertically.
Move the coupling back and forth in the direction of the arrows,
Move back and forth
in the direction of the and ensure that the coupling moves smoothly.
arrows.
5. Tighten the screws that were temporarily tightened in the order

shown in the figure below.
1
3 2
X motor 2
1 4
3
6. Press the coupling and worm shaft by hand in the direction of
Press
the arrow, and tighten the screw holding the coupling.
4
Warm shaft
Press
7. Perform Steps 1 through 14 in "6.3.9 X Gear Box" in the

reverse order to install the assembly.
5

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs

6.1 6.2 6.3
6
6.4 6.5 6.6
6.7 6.8 7
UV Parts Greasing

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs > Power Supply PCB Assy
Rev.
6.4.1 Power Supply PCB Assy 2.0
Power Supply
1
Assy.
 Procedures
 Start work after a lapse of 5 minutes from turning the main power OFF; otherwise, high voltage may
cause electric shock.
2
 Remove the Power Plug.
 Never touch any solders on the back of Power Supply PCB. Residual high voltage may cause electric
shock.
3
1. Turn off the main power and remove the Power Plug from the
Main PCB Assy.
Main body.
2. Pull the Power Supply Chassis from the back.:

The Main PCB should be seen.
Screw : P3x8SMW x5
4
3. Disconnect all the cables and connectors from the Main PCB,
and remove the clamps for cables.
5
Power Supply Chassis
Power Supply PCB Assy
4. Pull out the Power Supply Chassis completely.
 When pulling out the Power Supply Chassis, be

careful not to yank the cables or damage the con-
nectors. Make sure that the above step 3 is per-
formed properly.
5. Disconnect all connectors on PCB.

6
Power Supply PCB Assy
6. Remove the Power Supply PCB Assy.

Screw : P3x8SMW x7
8

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs > Main PCB
Rev.
6.4.2 Main PCB 2.0
 Procedures
 A button type lithium battery is used for this board. Warn following 1)~4).
1), Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
2), Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacture.
1
Recommended type : [CR2032]
3), Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.
4),When the battery is replaced with a new one, pay attention to the polarity at replacing.
 Remove the Power Plug. Adjacent parts can be at high voltage and it may cause electrical shock.
(Refer to “3.3.1 Replacement of Main PCB”) 2
3
2. Remove the Power Plug.
4. Remove the Main PCB Assy.

Main PCB Assy. Screws : P3x8SMW x6
6
When a used Main PCB is to be discarded, remove
7
the installed battery (CR2032).
Disposal of the used battery according to manufac-
turer’s instructions

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs > 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy
Rev.
6.4.3 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy 2.0
2
3042 Slider Relay PCBAssy.
 Procedures

3
(Refer to “3.3.2 Replacement of 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy”)

3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy.
2. Remove the Rear cover.
3. Disconnect all connectors on PCB. 4

When the PCB has been replaced, do not forget to
connect the following Connecters.
1),3042_Slider Relay Power short Assy (CN1)
2),IPPR3_Cascade short 13 Assy (CN25)
5
4. Remove the 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy.
Four screws
Screw : P3x8SMW x4
Make sure to perform the followings after reassem-

6
bling.
 Restore the parameters backed up in the Main PCB
for this board.
1), Turn on the power while holding down the
right and left keys at the same time to enter the 7
system parameter input mode.
2), Enter "4" in [INITIAL] of the system parame-
ter number 56, and then press ENTER key.
8
3), Restart the machine.

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs > 3042 Station 3 PCB Assy
Rev.
6.4.4 3042 Station 3 PCB Assy 2.0
1
 Procedures
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF. 2

PCB Cover 1. Move the Y-Bar to the near side.

3. Remome the PCB Cover.
Screw : P3x8SMW x4
4. Disconnect all connectors on PCB. 5

5. Remove the PCB.
Screw : P3x8SMW x4
Installing direction seen from the back

7
of machine

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs > Slider PCB
Rev.
Model UJF-3042 Issued 2010.04.08 Revised F/W ver --- Remark
6.4.5 Slider PCB 1.0
1
Slider PCB Assy.
 Procedures 2

3
Slider PCB Assy

• Upper Cover
4
4. Remove the Slider PCB Assy..
5
Screw : P3x8SMW x4

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs > 3042 Pump 3 PCB Assy
Rev.
Model UJF-3042 Issued 2010.04.08 Revised F/W ver --- Remark
6.4.6 3042 Pump 3 PCB Assy 1.0
1
3042 Pump 3 PCB Assy
2
 Procedures
3042 Pump 3 PCB Assy 1. Move the Y-Bar to the farthest position.
3
3. Remove the Rear Cover-Right.

4
5. Remove the 3042 Pump 3 PCB Assy..
Screw : P3x6SMW x4
5

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs > ID Contact PCB
Rev.
6.4.7 ID Contact PCB 2.0
 Procedures

(Refer to 3.3.3 Replacement of ID Contact PCB) 1
1. Loosen the screws and remove the ID Contact PCB from the
Cartridge Frame
Loosen
Cartridge Frame.
2
3
ID Contact PCB

When the Cartridge Frame is assembled, firstly,
tighten the screws temporarily, and then tighten the
screws after the position is adjusted.
5
6
Match the
surface
7
Cartridge Frame

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs > Keyboard PCB
Rev.
6.4.8 Keyboard PCB 2.0
2
Keyboard PCB Assy.
 Procedures
To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF. 3

4
Keyboard PCB Assy.
2. Remove the Key Panel Assy.
Refer to ” 6.1.2 Key Panel Assy “ for removing method.
Perform the following process with the removed Station Assy
5
upside down.
Key Panel Assy. (back side)

Keyboard PCB Assy.
6
4. Remove the KB Frame.
Screw : P3x8SMW x10
5. Remove the Keyboard PCB Assy

Screw : P3x8SMW x10
KB Frame
7
 Make sure that the Key Tops are oriented properly
and the contacts are free from fatigue.
 Make sure that the LCD surface and the inside of
8
the LCD of the nameplate are free from scratches,
dust and dirt or fingerprints.
 Tighten the screws in the order shown. After
assembly, press every button and make sure that a
click is felt.

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs > Linear Encoder PCB
Rev.
6.4.9 Linear Encoder PCB 2.0
2
Linear Encoder PCB Assy.
 Procedures
3
L-Sensor BKT
4
• Front Cover
• Upper Cover
• Head Cover
5
3. Remove the L-Sensor BKT together with the PCB.
Linear Encoder PCB Assy.
L-Sensor BKT 4. Remove the Linear Encoder PCB Assy..
6
Linear Encoder PCB
Assy.
 When the encoder is assembled, adjust the up/

down and front/back position of encoder surely
not to contact to the scale.
7
Set to the center as far
as possible.
1~1.5 mm
Encoder Scale Encoder

8

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors

6.1 6.2 6.3
6
6.4 6.5 6.6
7
6.7 6.8
UV Parts Greasing

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > X origin sensor
Rev.
6.5.1 X origin sensor 2.0
1
X origin sensor

3
PCB Cover
2. Remove the following cover:
• PCB Cover
• Rear Cover-under TB
Rear cover-Under TB
3. Loosen the fixing of the cable and pull out all connectors from
5
the PCB.
6
4. Remove the PCB BKT.(It is OK if PCB is attached with it.)
PCB BKT
8
X origin Sensor

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > X origin sensor
Rev.
6.5.1 X origin sensor 2.0
5. Take the Sensor off.

• Remove Fixng screw.
• Disconnect the connecter of the sensor.
1

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > Z origin sensor
Rev.
6.5.2 Z origin sensor 2.0
Z origin sensor
Z-Motor-Reinforce Plate 1. Remove the Table.

• Refer to 6.3.3 Table.
3
2. Turn the main power off.
4
3. Remove the Z-Motor-Reinforce Plate.
6
4. Take the Sensor off.
• Remove fixing screw.
• Disconnect the connector of the sensor.
7
8

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > Work area sensor
Rev.
6.5.3 Work area sensor 2.0
Work area sensor Work area sensor

Projection of the light side
1
Light receiving side
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
2
3
• Right cover
• Left cover
• Rear cover
• Rear Right cover
4
 Disassembly of the “ Projection of the light side”
Work area sensor BKT 3. Loosen the Cable fixing.
5
4. Take the Work area sensor BKT off.
6
Cable fxing
5. Disconnect the connector.

• “CN8” of the 3042 Pump3 PCB Assy.
7
CN8 3042 Pump3 PCB Assy.
Fixing screw x2 6. Take the sensor off from the Work area sensor BKT.
• Fixing screw x2 8

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > Work area sensor
Rev.
6.5.3 Work area sensor 2.0
 Disassembly of the “ Light receiving side”
Work area sensor BKT 7. Loosen the Cable fixing.
8. Take the Work area sensor BKT off.
1
Cable fxing
9. Disconnect the connector.

3042 Slider relay PCB Assy
• “CN27” of the 3042 Slider relay PCB Assy.
2
CN27
4
Fixing screw x2 10. Take the sensor off from the Work area sensor BKT.
• Fixing screw x2
11. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure. 6

 After assembling, be sure to adjust the light axis.
Refer to “ 4.3.5 Work Area Sensor Height
Adjustment “
7

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > Cover sensor
Rev.
6.5.4 Cover sensor 2.0
Cover sensor

3
2. Remove the Front cover.
3. Take the Micro SW-BKTL off .
4
Micro SW-BKTL
6
Connector Sensor 4. Take the Sensor off.
• Remove two fixing screws.
7
Fixing screw
8

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > Table Cover sensor
Rev.
6.5.5 Table Cover sensor 2.0
Table Cover sensor

1

Front Cover TB
2. Remove the Following covers.

3
• Front Cover Under-TB
• Front Cover TB
5
Front Cover Under-TB
Sensor 3. Take the Inter lock BKT off.
6
Fixing screw Inter lock BKT
4. Take the Sensor(Micro Switch) off.

• Remove two fixing screws. 7
8

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Other Electrical Parts

6.1 6.2 6.3
6
6.4 6.5 6.6
7
6.7 6.8
UV Parts Greasing

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > UV Parts

6.1 6.2 6.3
6
6.4 6.5 6.6
7
6.7 6.8
UV Parts Greasing

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > UV Parts > LED UV UNIT
Rev.
6.7.1 LED UV UNIT 2.0
1
LED UV UNIT
3
 The LED-UV UNIT “New Type” explained here has no compatibility with the “Old Type” as indi-
cated below. “New Type” indicated by this version is the one whose design has been changed in con-
sideration of ease of maintenance and individually replaceable part. Do not divert parts indicated by
this version to the LED-UV UNIT of “Old Type”.
No connector on the top surface. Connector can be con-
4
nected on the top surface.
5
Old Type New Type
6
 When the UVLED PCB is required to be replaced due to illuminance deterioration etc., replace
“LEDUV Irradiation Assy” of the figure below. Replacement of UVLED PCB only is forbidden
strictly.
After illuminance and operation were checked in the factory, and the one whose performance
could be secured is provided as the maintenance parts. Therefore, it is prohibited to use parts
that were disassembled and assembled in the field again.
8
LEDUV Irradiation Assy

Rev.
 Procedures
Coupler of Cooling
1. Drain the cooling water completely.
Water Tube x2 Follow the procedure given in
“ 4.2.8 EXCHANGE LED UV “
1
Fixing Screw
• Front Cover
• Upper Cover
4. Disconnect the relay connector and the Two Couplers of Cool-

ing Water Tube.
2
5. Remove the Fixing Screw and take LED UV UNIT off.
Connecter x2
Handle the device carefully not to damage the radiat-
3
ing surface (the bottom surface).
6. Evacuate cooling water remaining in the LED-UV UNIT as

much as possible.
By making the removed LED-UV UNIT upside down, evac-
uate cooling water from its piping.
4
7. Remove the Front Cover and Filter.
• Remove the hand screw.
5
Front Cover
Filter
6
Top Cover 8. Remove the Top Cover.
• Screw x2
Screw x2
8

Rev.
9. Remove the DRV PCB Cooling Fan Assy.

FAN Connector
CN4 (1) Pull the Connector off. (CN4)
(2) Remove the Fixing screw.
(3) Remove the DRV PCB Cooling Fan Assy by pulling it
upward.
1
DRV PCB Cooling Fan Assy
2
Fixing screw x2
Side Cover-R 10. Remove the Side Cover-R.

• Fixing sccrew x2
3
Fixing screw
5
6
11. Remove the Side Cover-L.
LEDUVx2-DRIVE PCB Assy
CN5, CN6 (1) Pull the connecter off.
• LEDUVx2-DRIVE PDB Assy CN5, CN6
7
(2) Remove the Fixing screws(x2).
 Perform removal and replacement of LEDUVx2-

8
DRIVE PCB Assy in this step.
Side Cover-L

Rev.
12. Remove the Reflector BKT.

Reflector BKT
• Fixing screw x2
13. Remove the Glass Holder and the Glass.
2
Glass
Holder • Fixing screw x2
Glass
3
14. Take the Glass cushions out.
Glass cushion x4
 Be careful not to lose it.

4
5
This is the end of disassembling.
LED UV Irradiation Assy

 It is strictly prohibited to perform maintenance by
disassembling more from the status indicated in
the left figure. 6
The Assy in the left figure is assembled in the
factory. Therefore, to disassemble, assemble and
use parts again in the field may cause problem of
7
heat release defect etc.

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > UV Parts > UV Cooling Unit
Rev.
6.7.2 UV Cooling Unit 2.0
UV Cooling Unit 2
 Procedures

3
Syringe Follow the procedure given in
“ 4.2.8 EXCHANGE LED UV “
5
• Front Cover
6
• Front-Left Cover
7
4. Remove the water tube (IN) and air vent tube (AIR) from the
IN(Upper) bracket. (Loosen the nuts on the back of the bracket.)
AIR(Lower)

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > UV Parts > UV Cooling Unit
Rev.
6.7.2 UV Cooling Unit 2.0
5. Disconnect the relay connector of following Electrical Assy.

Float Sensor Cooling Water Pump
• Cooling Water Pump Assy
Radiator Fan
• Radiator Fan Assy
• Float Sensor Assy
6. Disconnect the Two Couplers of Cooling Water Tube
Couplers of Cooling Water Tube

2
7. Remove the two screws.
Screw : P4x10SMW x2
4
two screws
8. Pull out and remove the UV Cooling Unit.
UV Cooling Unit

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > UV Parts > Cooling Water Pump
Rev.
6.7.3 Cooling Water Pump 2.0
Cooling Water Pump
2
 Procedures
UV Cooling Unit.
Follow the procedure given in
3
”4.2.8 EXCHANGE LED UV ”
3. Remove the UV Cooling Unit.

4
” 6.7.2 UV Cooling Unit ”
Cooling Water Pump

5
4. Remove the Cooling Water Pump.
Screw : P3x10SMW x2

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > UV Parts > Radiator Fan Assy.
Rev.
6.7.4 Radiator Fan Assy. 2.0
Radiator Fan Assy
2
 Procedures
UV Cooling Unit
3
”4.2.8 EXCHANGE LED UV ”
3. Remove the UV Cooling Unit.

4
” 6.7.2 UV Cooling Unit ”
Radiator Fan Assy

5
4. Remove the Radiator Fan Assy.
Screw : P3x30SMW x4
7

Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Greasing

6.1 6.2 6.3
6
6.4 6.5 6.6
7
6.7 6.8
UV Parts Greasing

Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions
7. Troubleshooting
7.1 7.2
7
Details on Errors and Malfunctions Detailed Methods of Coping with
the Malfunctions

Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > Concerning Errors and Malfunctions
Rev.
7.1.1 Concerning Errors and Malfunctions 2.0
 Outline
This chapter describes the troubleshooting for UJF-3042/FX.
 Rough Identification of the Source of the Trouble

At the beginning of troubleshooting, it is necessary to identify roughly which functions the trouble relates to.
1
Problems can be roughly classified into those that relate to the printer itself and those that involve the connection
between the printer and the host computer.
 Problems with the printer itself

The cause of the trouble can be identified by executing appropriate functions or using test functions.
 Problems concerning the connection to the host computer
2
Hardware: Broken wire or faulty contact of cables
Software: Transmission by improper application setting
In the standard setting of UJF-3042/FX, priority is given to the host computer.

Check the settings on the host computer to see if there is any improper parameter setting.
3
START
Precautions in maintenance 4
Is there error message? Yes Refer to 7.1.2 List of Error Messages.
No
5
Trouble due Yes
to the print quality? Refer to 7.2 Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions
(Add information sequentially)
No
Rough identification of error source

Execute appropriate functions or use test func-
tions of UJF-3042/FX
6
7
Do the
above functions operate No
normally?
Yes
Troubles on the host computer side
8
If this troubleshooting cannot correct the trouble, check to see if the same trouble occurs with another
host computer (if possible).

Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > Concerning Errors and Malfunctions
Rev.
7.1.1 Concerning Errors and Malfunctions 2.0
 Checking Procedure
This section describes troubleshooting procedures for the problems for which error messages are displayed.
1. Identifying the error category
The causes of errors can be classified into the following categories:
 Handling error on the host computer side

1
 Trouble on the host computer side
 Trouble with the Interface Cable
2
 Printer handling error
 Printer mechanical trouble
 Printer hardware trouble
 Printer firmware trouble
2. Initial action
3
Refer to the error message, and judge whether the trouble lies on the host computer side or on the printer side.
 Has any of the interface conditions (printer model setting, command, communication conditions, etc.) been
changed? 4
 Does the trouble occur under specific conditions?
 Does the same trouble occur repeatedly?
3. Failure on the printer side

5
Take the following steps to repair the printer.
6
 Uploading and checking of parameters
 Reinstalling of firmware
 Checking of FFC and cable connections
 Replace the defective part (sensor, etc.) or make the necessary adjustment.
 Replace the PCBs. 7

4. Repair at the factory
If the error recurs even after the corrective measures specified here are taken, return the printer to the factory of
MIMAKI for repair.
8

Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of Error Messages
Rev.
7.1.2 List of Error Messages 2.0
 List of Error Messages (1/9)

No. LCD Cause List of Countermeasures
ERROR 108 Head connection error 1. Check the setting of loading number of the head in the
1 (Head connection can not be confirmed) parameter.
HD CONNECT[12345678]
(System parameter No.41 HEAD NO=3)
ERROR 108 Head thermistor
(Head temperature can not be measured) 2. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
HD THERMIS[12345678] Slider PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
2
3. Check connection between the Slider PCB from the
Print Head
4. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one.
1
(Refer to 6.4.5)
5. Replace the Print Head with a new one. (Refer to 6.2.1)
ERROR 12e Abnormality of the Print head. 1. Update F/W.
2
Head Faild[xxxx] Abnormality of the Driver of the Print 2. Initialize a parameter.
head. 3. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
(The details of [xxxx] are Slider PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
explained below this 4. Replace the FFC located between the Slider PCB and
3 list.) the SL-Relay PCB.
(Refer to 6.4.5)
7. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
3
ERROR 122 PRAM size is not sufficient at FW 1. Update F/W.
4 upgrading (fw_updmsg).
CHECK:SDRAM 2. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
ERROR 128 HDC FIFO OVER error 1. Check the parameter.
4
HDC FIFO OVER (Data transmission speed is too fast (Is the scan parameter the default value?)
5 Control PCB trouble) 2. Update F/W.
HDC FIFO OVERRUN is detected at the 3. Check if there is no data error from RIP.
scan slider process (ScanSlider) 4. To make sure, repeat RIP.
ERROR 128 HDC FIFO UNDER error 5. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
HDC FIFO UNDER (Data transmission speed is too slow Main PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
Control PCB trouble)
5
6. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
HDC FIFO UNDERRUN is detected at the SL-Relay PCB and the Slider PCB.
scan slider process (ScanSlider) 7. Replace the FFC located between the Main PCB and
the SL-Relay PCB.
6 8. Replace the FFC located between the SL-Relay PCB
and the Slider PCB.
6
(Refer to 6.4.5)
(Refer to 3.3.2)
11. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
ERROR 129 Battery dead (RTC battery dead is 1. Replace a battery equipped on the Main PCB with new
BATTERY EXCHANGE detected.) one. (CR2032)
Proper information of Printer or Time * The new battery should be the same product or the
7
7
(Dedicated IC) unusable on Printer equivalent.
initializing process (opinit). * Discard the old battery according to the instruction
from the maker.
ERROR 130 Head data transferring sequence error 1. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
HD DATA SEQ Slider PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
SL-Relay PCB and the Main PCB.
8
3. Replace the FFC located between the Slider PCB and
the SL-Relay PCB.
4. Replace the FFC located between the SL-Relay PCB
8
and the Main PCB.
(Refer to 6.4.5)
(Refer to 3.3.2)

Rev.

ERROR 146 Sequential number abnormality of the 1. Initialize a Event log.
9 event log
E-LOG SEQ 2. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
ERROR 151 Main board 1.2V power supply is 1. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
10 abnormal.
Main PCB V1R2
1
ERROR 152 Main board 2.5V power supply is 1. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
11 abnormal.
Main PCB V2R5
ERROR 153 Main board 3.3V power supply is 1. The output voltage check of the Power supply PCB.
12 abnormal.
Main PCB V3R3 2. Replace the Power supply PCB with a new one. (Refer
ERROR 154 Main board 5V power supply is abnormal. to 6.4.1)
13 3. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
Main PCB V05
14
ERROR 155
Main PCB V35-1
Main board 35-1V power supply is
abnormal. 2
ERROR 156 Main board 5VB power supply is
15 abnormal.
Main PCB V5B
ERROR 157 Main board VTT power supply is 1. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
16 abnormal.
3
Main PCB VTT
ERROR 158 Main board 35-2V power supply is 1. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
17 abnormal.
Main PCB V352
ERROR 16e Main board 3.3VÇa power supply is 1. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
18 abnormal.
Main PCB V3R3B
ERROR 15f COM driver becomes the high 1. Confirm movement of Slider Relay Cooling Fan.
4
HEAD DRIVE HOT temperature. 2. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
Slider PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
19
the SL-Relay PCB
ERROR 171 New Print Head was recognized.

(Refer to 6.4.5)
It is normal that an error occurs only at the time of the first
5
NEW HEAD CONNECT start after having connected a new head.
It is abnormal that an error occurs at the time of start every
time..
6
20 1. Check connection between the Slider PCB from the
Print Head
(Refer to 6.4.5)
3. Replace the Print Head with a new one. (Refer to
3.1.1)
ERROR 172 The main PCB Q6 is disabled (short mode). 1. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
21 Main PCB Q6 Check (Displayed only at startup in the maintenance
open mode or other than SUPPORT=0.) 7
ERROR 201 Command error 1. Check if the output set of the PC matches the set of the
22 machine side?
COMMAND Other data than commands is received
2. Change the profile.
ERROR 202 Parameter error
3. Check if there is no parameter error?
PARAMETER Parameter out of the numeral value range
8
23 is received 4. Check if there is no trouble on the USB Cable?
5. Replace the USB Cable.
ERROR 203 Maintenance command 1. Check the PRM file.
Ment Command Operation of a maintenance command fails 2. Check the number of each parameter.
24 * Non-disclosed command (if PRM matches up to the machine.)
Parameter Up/Download and time
setting (LcAeMent [M0xfe])

Rev.

ERROR 304 USB initialization error 1. Check if there is no parameter error?
25 (Failures in initializing USB device)
USB INIT ERR 2. Replace the USB Cable.
ERROR 305 USB time-out 3. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
26 USB TIME OUT (Occurrence of time-out error on USB
device)
27
ERROR 401
MOTOR X
X Servo error
(Excessive load to the X-motor)
1. Check if there is no error on the print data.
(Check if the same error occurs on other data?) 1
ERROR 403 X-motor current 2. Check if it moves to the X-direction smoothly in the
(Over current error of X-motor is detected.) power-off condition.
X CURRENT
3. Make sure no torsion on the X-bar or Y-bar.
4. Check if there is no trouble on the Timing Belt.
2
5. Check if there is no trouble on the Motor Cable.
28 (disconnecting, burnout, or the like)
6. Check the FFC between each PCB and Short-
connectors connected on the PCB.
7. Replace the X-axis Motor with a new one.
(Refer to 6.3.1)
Y Servo error 1. Check if there is no error on the print data.
3
ERROR 402
29 (Excessive load to the Y-motor) (Check if the same error occurs on other data?)
MOTOR Y
ERROR 404 Y-motor current 2. Check if it moves to the Y-direction smoothly in the
(Over current error of Y-motor is detected.) power-off condition.
Y CURRENT
3. Check if there is no trouble on the Timing Belt.
4. Check if there is no trouble on the Motor Cable.
30 (disconnecting, burnout, or the like)
4
5. Check the FFC between each PCB and Short-
connectors connected on the PCB.
6. Replace the Y-axis motor with a new one.
(Refer to 6.3.2)
ERROR 420 Z-axis of coordinate is misaligned. 1. Check the weight of a work on the table.
Z POSITION 2. Check the parameters.
3. Check the Tabel mechanism.
31
(including rattling, loosening of screws, or smooth
motion)
4. Check if there is no trouble on the Z Origin Sensor.
5
5. Replace the Z Origin sensor with a new one.
6. Replace the 3042 Station3 PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.4)
6
ERROR 421 Gives warning of filter blot. 1. Perform [MAINTENANCE] -> [STATION MENT:
32 !CHECK FILTER  Mist absorption filter CHECK FILTER] and replace the “Mist absorption
 UV mist filter filter” and the “UV mist filter”.
ERROR 505 The Work Area Sensor detected an Lower the table until this warning disappears.
!WORK High obstacle that can hit the head.
If this warning does not disappear when the table is
7
lowered to the bottom.
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST] -
>[HEIGHT-SES].
2. Readjust the Work Area Sensor.
33 3. Readjust the height of the carriage.
4. Check the Connectors of Work Area Sensor connected
on the PCB
5. Replace the Work Area Sensor with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
8
7. Replace the Pump 3 PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.4)

Rev.

ERROR 509 HDC position counter error 1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST] -
HDC POSCNT >[Y-ORG].(Confirm that the ON/OFF display is
switched by moving the carriage left and right.)
2. [Execute [#TEST]->[CHECK ENCODER].
1
3. Check the assembly of Y-scale, and confirm that there
is neither dirt nor scratch.
4. Check in manual if the Head Assy. (carriage) moves
left and right smoothly.
5. Check the connector connection of Y-origin Sensor
and Linear Encoder.
34 6. Replace the Y-origin Sensor or Linear Encoder with a
2
new one.
7. Check the assembly and connector connection of Y-
axis Motor.
8. Replace the Y-axis Motor with a new one. (Refer to
6.3.2)
9. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.5)
(Refer to 3.3.2)
3
ERROR 50a Y-origin error 1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST] -
Y ORIGIN (Origin of Y-axis can not be detected) >[Y-ORG].(Confirm that the ON/OFF display is
4
and Linear Encoder.
5. Replace the Y-origin Sensor or Linear Encoder with a
35 new one.
axis Motor. 5
6.3.2)
6.4.5)
6
(Refer to 3.3.2)
ERROR 50f Liner Scale error 1. Check the assembly position of Linear Scale and
L-SCALE BLACK Encoder PCB Assy..
2. Check Linear Scale (scratches or dirtiness or so.)
36
3. Replace the Linear Scale with a new one.
4. Replace the Encoder PCB Assy. with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.9) 7
ERROR 510 X-origin error 1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST]->
X ORIGIN (Origin of X-axis can not be detected) [X-ORG].
2. Check the connection of connector of the X-origin
Sensor.
8
3. Replace the X-origin Sensor with a new one.
37
4. Check the assembly and connector connection of X-
axis Motor.。.
(Refer to 6.3.1)

Rev.

ERROR 511 Z-origin error 1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST]->
Z ORIGIN (Origin of Z-axis can not be detected) [TBL-ORG].
2. Check the connection of connector of the Z-origin
Sensor.
38 3. Replace the Z-origin Sensor with a new one.
4. Disconnect and connect the connector of the Z-
Motor(Stepping motor).
5. Replace the Station III PCB with a new one.
1
(Refer to 6.4.4)
ERROR 601 Ink near end (A small amount of ink left) (When the message is still displayed even after a new Ink
INK NEAREND Cartridge or an empty Ink Cartridge is charged;)
2
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST]->
[INK NEND1](The number meets the cartridge No.).
2. Check the peripheral and the assembly of the End
Sensor.
3. Check the connection of the Presence Sensor and the
39 Near End Sensor.
4. Replace the Cartridge with a new one
3
5. Replace the Presence/Near End Sensor with a new
one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
ERROR 602 Ink end (No ink left) (If this message appears when a new cartridge or a
cartridge with enough ink is set)
4
INK END
2. Check the peripheral and the assembly of the End
Sensor.
40 End Sensor.
5
4. Replace the Cartridge with a new one.
5. Replace the Presence / Near End Sensor with a new
one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
No cartridge (Cartridge is not installed) (When the message is still displayed even after a Ink
6
ERROR 603
NO CARTRDG Cartridge is charged;)
[INK1](The number meets the cartridge No.)..
2. Check the peripheral and the assembly of the Presence
Sensor.
41
7
End Sensor
4. .Replace the Cartridge with a new one
5. Replace the Presence/Near End Sensor with a new
one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)

Rev.

ERROR 605 Wiper lifetime 1. Execute [FUNCTION MAINTENANCE]-
!CLEANING WIPER (Wiping times exceeding the specified >[STATION]->[MENT:WIPER CLEANING] to clean
number.) the wiper.
1),Wiping times 2. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
(Ink parameter 1 No45 WipeCnt)
42
Wiping time is cleared when the
following is executed: 1
[FUNCTION MAINTENANCE]-
>[STATION]->[MENT:WIPER
EXCHG]
2),Specified number :Wiper life
2
(Ink parameter 2 No58 WIPElmt) x
Wiper replacement level
ERROR 606 The IC chip of the ink cartridge is not read (If this message appears when a correct cartridge is set)
WRONG CARTRIDGE properly. 1. Check the assembly of the ID Contact PCB and the
shape of the contact plate, and execute the cleaning.
2. Check the connection of the ID Contact PCB.
43
3
4. Replace the ID Contact PCB Assy. with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.3)
(Refer to 3.3.2)
ERROR 607 Warning for cleaning around the cap 1. Clean the cap.
CAP CLEANING (A specified number of flushing on the
4
cap exceeded.) (If this message appears after cleaning the cap)
1),Capcleaning counter
(Ink parameter 1 No04 CapClean)
Counter is cleared when the following
44 is executed:
5
[FUNCTION MAINTENANCE]-
>[STATION]->[MENT:CARRIAGE
OUT]
2),Specified number of the Capcleaning :
warning level
100x2^(Ink parameter 2 No.66
Cap.LM -1)
ERROR 608
CARTRIDGE
Ink is tried to fill with unusable cartridge 1. Check the type of the ink cartridge.
installed. 6
Execute the followings if the type of the ink cartridge is
correct.
2. Check the assembly of the ID Contact PCB and the
45
7
(Refer to 3.3.3)
(Refer to 3.3.2)
Wiper bottle warning 1. Select [FUNCTION MAINTENANCE]->[STATION]-
8
ERROR 60b
WIPER BOTTLE A great deal of ink is in the Wiper Bottle. >[MENT:WIPER BOTTLE] and dispose of ink in the
Wiper Bottle.
Displayed when the Wiper Nozzle
Suction Pump exceeds the 2,500 times
46 [Fixed].
Wiper Pump suction times:

Ink parameter 1 No47 [Wipe Pump ]

Rev.

ERROR 60c Type of inserted Ink Cartridge is different. 1. Check the type of the ink cartridge.
INK TYPE
Execute the followings if the type of the ink cartridge is
correct.
47
3. Check the connection of the ID Contact PCB. 1
(Refer to 3.3.3)
2
(Refer to 3.3.2)
ERROR 60d Remaining ink is not enough to execute Replace the Cartridge with a new one
48 cleaning or to fill ink.
REMAIN INK
ERROR 60e Ink is not filled into some heads. Fill ink into unfilled heads.
49
NOT COMPLETE FUP
ERROR 60f Some ink cartridges are expired. 1. Check the expiration date of the ink.
3
Expiration (If this message appears when a correct cartridge is set)
50
4
(Refer to 3.3.3)
(Refer to 3.3.2)
ERROR 610 Ink is not filled into all the heads. Fill ink to all the heads.
51
NOT FILLUP
ERROR 611 "CASE WEIGHT" of 600ml cartridge is not Set "CASE WEIGHT" for "600ml CARTRIDGE" of
52
set. "MACHINE SET".
5
Case Weight
ERROR 612 Remaining amount of ink became less. Enter the cartridge weight from "CART WEIGHT" menu of
53
INK LVL LOW "SET UP".
ERROR 613 Remaining amount of ink became none.  If ink remains, enter the cartridge weight from "CART
54 INK LVL END WEIGHT" menu of "SET UP".
 If ink does not remain, replace it with a new cartridge.
6
ERROR 614 Remaining amount of ink was failed to be 1. Pull the cartridge out and then insert it to write it again.
55
Preservation Failure written. 2. If the error cannot be solved, replace it with a new cartridge.
ERROR 615 The cartridge weight was not entered. Enter the cartridge weight.
56
Cartridge Weight
ERROR 702 Defective of the thermistor (disconnection 1. Check each thermistor.
57 or short)
THERMISTOR 2. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
ERROR 705
WATER LACK
Water in the cooling water buffer tank is
low.
1. Check amount of water in the cooling water buffer
tank, and replace the Nonfreezing fluid mixture water
if lacking.
7
2. If water decreases quickly, check water leakage from
the cooling water path (a tube or a radiator).
• Execute [#TEST SENSOR TEST]->[CoolFloat] to
58 check the sensor operation.
3. Check the assembly of the Float Sensor and the
connector connection.
4. Replace the Float Sensor and the Cable with a new
8
one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)

Rev.

ERROR 706 Temperature in the UV unit is above its 1. Check connection and operation of the radiator fan and
UV UNIT OVER HEAT specification. the UV unit fan.
2. Check the operation of the water cooling pump.
3. Check water level of the cooling water buffer tank and
a path of the cooling water.
59
4. Check the connection of connector of the LED UV
UNIT Assy and the Slider PCB.
5. Replace the LED UV UNIT Assy with a new one.
1
(Refer to 6.7.1)
6.4.5)
ERROR 707 Is the heater of the head disconnected?

(Refer to 3.3.2)
1. Check the room temperature is not too low. 2
!HD HEATER BRK (The temperature does not rise after 2. Replace the Print Head with a new one. (Refer to 3.1.1)
60
heating for over a certain period of time.) 3. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.5)
ERROR 708 The thermistor in the UV unit 1. Check the connection of connector of the LED UV
3
UV THERMISTOR BRK (Temperature sensor) is disconnected. UNIT Assy and the Slider PCB.
61
(Refer to 6.7.1)
6.4.5)
ERROR 70a The LED UV unit has been broken. 1. Replace the LEDUVx2-DRIVE PDB Assy with a new
one. (Refer to 6.7.1)
4
62 LED UV CURRENT Or, the detected current is abnormal.
2. Replace the LEDUV Irradiation Assy with a new one.
(Refer to 6.7.1)
ERROR 901 The operation panel is incorrectly Explain a user the operation method.
OPERATION operated. (Carry out the followings if the error still occurs)
(Example: Test drawing was executed 1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[KEYBOARD].
without ink filled.) (Check that there is no hang-up nor subduction on Key
5
Tops at the same time.)
63 Keyboard PCB and the Main PCB.
3. Replace the Keyboard FFC
(Keyboard PCB ~ the Main PCB).
4. Replace the Keyboard PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.8)
ERROR 902 Drawing data is remaining.

(Carry out the followings if the error still occurs when
data is cleared.)
6
DATA REMAIN
1. Check errors in the parameter.
64 2. Remove USB cable from the printer and execute data
clear. -> If solved, it is a problem on USB cable or PC.
7
3. Replace the USB Cable with a new one.
ERROR 90d Loaded number of the head is assumed Check the setting of loading number of the head in the
65 NO HEAD SELECT zero. parameter.
(System parameter No.41 HEAD NO=3)

Rev.

ERROR 04 Access Error of the PARAMETER ROM (If “PCB SLRY” is displayed for a few seconds while a
PARAM ROM 1.The state that cannot access “ROM” version is displayed at startup before displaying errors)
on the SL-Relay PCB. 1. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
SL-Relay PCB and the Main PCB.
2.The state that cannot access
1
“EEPROM” on the HEAD2.
3. Replace the FFC located between the SL-Relay PCB
and the Main PCB.
the SL-Relay PCB.
66 5. Replace the SL-Relay PCB.
6. Replace the Slider PCB.
7. Replace the Main PCB.
2
( If "Area:_H__" is displayed on the second line without
"PCB SLRY" displayed at startup by pressing [FUNC]
key while an error is displayed.)
1. Disconnect and connect the FFC of the HEAD2.
2. Replace the Slider PCB.
3
3. Replace the HEAD2.
 Details of ERROR 12e Head Failed [xxxx]
 The relationships between [xxxx] (hexadecimal numeral) bit No. and the error contents are as below: 4
bit Hexadecimal Reason for error occurrence Cause for occurrence
numeral indi-
cation
bit0 [0001] Abnormal detection status of head signal (MN signal)
(Slider PCB)
1. Failure of head
2. Failure of Slider PCB 5
bit1 [0002] COM-OFF signal output status 1. FFC breakage between SL-Relay PCB and
(Slider PCB) Slider PCB
2. Failure of head
3. Failure of Slider PCB
bit2 [0004] 35V-1 Power supply voltage drop detection
(Slider PCB)
1. FFC breakage between SL-Relay PCB and
Slider PCB 6
3. Failure of SL-Relay PCB
bit3 [0008] Driving wave shape circuit Current limit over 1. Failure of SL-Relay PCB
(SL-Relay PCB) (F2 blowout, COM circuit failure, etc.)
3. Failure of head
However, when bit6 or bit7 is “1” and an error
7
([3F88] or [3FC8] etc.) has occurred at startup,
that error cause has priority.
bit4 [0010] COM-OFF signal input status 1. FFC breakage between SL-Relay PCB and
Slider PCB
8
(SL-Relay PCB)
2. Failure of head
bit5 Not Use
bit6 [0040] 37V of SL-Relay PCB is not normal. 1. Failure of SL-Relay PCB
(Displayed only at startup.)

Rev.
bit Hexadecimal Reason for error occurrence Cause for occurrence

numeral indi-
cation
bit7 [0080] 37V voltage of the Slider PCB does not come. 1. F2 blowout of the SL-Relay PCB.
(displayed only at startup) 2. FFC breakage between SL-Relay PCB and
Slider PCB
1
4. Failure of SL-Relay PCB
bit8 [0100] Wave shape driver circuit for head 1 Short check NG 1. FFC breakage between SL-Relay PCB and
Slider PCB
bit9 [0200] Wave shape driver circuit for head 2 Short check NG
bit10 [0400] Wave shape driver circuit for head 3 Short check NG 3. Failure of SL-Relay PCB
bit11 [0800] Wave shape driver circuit for head 4 Short check NG 4. Failure of head
2
*)If 37V power supply route also has a problem,
bit13 [2000] Wave shape driver circuit for head 6 Short check NG an error may occur.
bit14 [4000] Wave shape driver circuit for head 7 Short check NG Refer to bit6 and bit7 error.
Error display example)
If the F2 fuse of the slider PCB has been blown, "Head Failed [3F88]" is displayed at startup, and then "Head
3
Failed [0008]" is also displayed.

Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of Warning Messages
Rev.
7.1.3 List of Warning Messages 2.0
 List of Warning Messages (1/2)

No. Message Cause Corrective Measures
1 <LOCAL> NO CARTRDG No cartridge (Cartridge is not (When the message is still displayed even after a Ink Cartridge is
MCYKWR installed) charged;)
[INK1](The number meets the cartridge No.).
1
2. Check the peripheral and the assembly of the Presence Sensor.
3. Check the connection of the Presence Sensor and the End Sensor
4. .Replace the Cartridge with a new one
5. Replace the Presence/Near End Sensor with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
2 <LOCAL> INK NEAREND Ink near end (A small amount (When the message is still displayed even after a new Ink Cartridge or an
MCYKWR of ink left) empty Ink Cartridge is charged;) 2
2. Check the peripheral and the assembly of the End Sensor.
3. Check the connection of the Presence Sensor and the Near End
3
Sensor.
5. Replace the Presence/Near End Sensor with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
4
3 <LOCAL> INK END Ink end (No ink left) (If this message appears when a new cartridge or a cartridge with
MCYKWR enough ink is set)
2. Check the peripheral and the assembly of the End Sensor.
3. Check the connection of the Presence Sensor and the End Sensor.
5. Replace the Presence / Near End Sensor with a new one.
6. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one. 5
(Refer to 3.3.2)
4 <LOCAL> Expiration Some ink cartridges are 1. 1. Check the expiration date of the ink.
MCYKWR expired.
6
(If this message appears when a correct cartridge is set)
2. Check the assembly of the ID Contact PCB and the shape of the
contact plate, and execute the cleaning.
5. Replace the ID Contact PCB Assy. with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.3)
7
(Refer to 3.3.2)
5 <LOCAL> INK TYPE Type of inserted Ink Cartridge 1. Check the type of the ink cartridge.
MCYKWR is different.
6 <LOCAL> ColorofINK The color of Ink Cartridge Execute the followings if the type of the ink cartridge is correct.
MCYKWR inserted is different from the 2. Check the assembly of the ID Contact PCB and the shape of the
contact plate, and execute the cleaning.
8
color to be set.
7 <LOCAL> NON-ORIGNL Non-MIMAKI genuine Ink 3. Check the connection of the ID Contact PCB.
MCYKWR Cartridge charged 4. Replace the Cartridge with a new one
5. Replace the ID Contact PCB Assy. with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.3)
8 <LOCAL> WRONG INK IC IC chip of Ink Cartridge
MCYKWR unreadable properly
(Refer to 3.3.2)

Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of Warning Messages
Rev.
7.1.3 List of Warning Messages 2.0
 List of Warning Messages (2/2)

No. Message Cause Corrective Measures
9 <LOCAL> The Work Area Sensor Lower the table until this warning disappears.
!WORK High detected an obstacle that can
hit the head. If this warning does not disappear when the table is lowered to the
bottom.
1
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST] ->[HEIGHT-
SES].
2. Readjust the Work Area Sensor.
3. Readjust the height of the carriage.
4. Check the Connectors of Work Area Sensor connected on the PCB
2
(Refer to 3.3.2)
7. Replace the Pump 3 PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.6)
10 <LOCAL> Water in the cooling water 1. Check amount of water in the cooling water buffer tank, and replace
WATER LACK buffer tank is low. the Nonfreezing fluid mixture water if lacking.
3
2. If water decreases quickly, check water leakage from the cooling
water path (a tube or a radiator).
•Execute [#TEST SENSOR TEST]->[CoolFloat] to check the sensor
operation.
3. Check the assembly of the Float Sensor and the connector
connection.
4. Replace the Float Sensor and the Cable with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2) 4
11 <LOCAL> A great deal of ink is in the 1. Check the Wast ink tank.
!WS INKTANK CHK Wast ink tank 2. Select [FUNCTION MAINTENANCE]->[STATION]-
>[MENT:WASTE TANK] and dispose of ink in the Wast ink tank.
5
12 <LOCAL> A great deal of ink is in the 1. Check the Wiper Bottle.
WIPER BOTTLE Wiper Bottle. 2. Select [FUNCTION MAINTENANCE]->[STATION]-
>[MENT:WIPER BOTTLE] and dispose of ink in the Wiper Bot-
tle.
13 <LOCAL> Wiping times exceeding the 1. Execute [FUNCTION MAINTENANCE]->[STATION]-
CLEANING WIPER specified number. >[MENT:WIPER CLEANING] to clean the wiper.
6
14 <LOCAL> A filter may be stained. 1. Check the filter.
!CHECK FILTER
1. Execute [FUNCTION MAINTENANCE]->[STATION]-
>[MENT:CHECK FILTER] to replace the filter..
15 <LOCAL> Warning for cleaning around cap 1. Execute [STATION] -> [MENT: CARRIAGE OUT] to clean the cap.
CAP CLEANING (Flushing times on the cap
exceeded the specified
16 <LOCAL>
number.)
[CASE WEIGHT] of 600ml 1. Set [CASE WEIGHT] from [MACHINE SET] -> [600ml CARTRIDGE]. 7
Case Weight CARTRIDGE was not set.
17 <LOCAL> The remaining amount of ink 1. Enter the cartridge weight from [CART WEIGHT] menu of [SET UP].
INK LVL LOW became less.
8
18 <LOCAL> Remaining amount of ink became  If ink remains, enter the cartridge weight from "CART WEIGHT" menu of
INK LVL END none. "SET UP".
• If ink does not remain, replace it with a new cartridge.
19 <LOCAL> 1. Check the illuminance of the LED UV lamp. If it is less than the specified
!CHECK LED UV LEVEL value, replace the lamp.
20 <LOCAL> Remaining amount of ink was 1. Pull the cartridge out and then insert it to write it again.
Preservation Failure failed to be written. 2. If the error cannot be solved, replace it with a new cartridge.
21 <LOCAL> The cartridge weight was not 1. Enter the cartridge weight.
Cartridge Weight entered.

Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of SYSTEM HALT
Rev.
7.1.4 List of SYSTEM HALT 2.0
 List of SYSTEM HALT (1/7)

No. LCD Cause Corrective Measures
SYSTEM HALT (*) 35 V Power recovery error 1. Replace the Power Supply PCB with a new one. (Refer
1 104 : +35V RECVR to 6.4.1)
SYSTEM HALT (*) F-ROM CLEAR error (F-ROM clear unable) 1. Execute the memory check (F-ROM) of [#TEST].
1
10e :FROM CLEAR F-ROM is not clearable on Parameter 2. Upload the parameter and initialize all parameters with
2
writing, FW down loading and Log clearing. [#PARAMETER].
(fls_secclr) 3. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
SYSTEM HALT (*) FROM WRITE error (F-ROM writing 1. Execute the memory check (F-ROM) of [#TEST].
10f : FROM WRITE unable) 2. Upload the parameter and initialize all parameters with
3 F-ROM is not clearable on Parameter [#PARAMETER].
2
writing, FW down loading and Log clearing. 3. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
(fls_secclr)
SYSTEM HALT (*) No Keyboard PCB 1. Check the connections between the Keyboard PCB and
110 : PCB KEY the Main PCB and then disconnect and connect the
FFCs.
4 2. Replace the FFCs of the above routes.
SYSTEM HALT (*) No Pump III PCB

1. Check the connections between the Pump PCB and the 3
114 : PCB PUMP Main PCB, and then disconnect and connect the FFCs .
2. Replace the FFCs of the above routes.
3. Replace the Pump III PCB with a new one.
5
(Refer to 6.4.6)
(Refer to 3.3.2)
4
SYSTEM HALT (*) Main PCB fuse (F1) disconnected. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
6
115 : PCB MAIN-F1
SYSTEM HALT (*) Main PCB fuse (F2) disconnected. Before Main PCB replace, do the following checks.
5
7 1. Check the connections between the SL-Relay PCB
116 : PCB MAIN-F2
SYSTEM HALT (*) Main PCB fuse (F3) disconnected. and the Main PCB, and then disconnect and connect
8 the FFCs or the like.
117 : PCB MAIN-F3 .
SYSTEM HALT (*) Main PCB fuse (F4) disconnected. 2. Check short between 1 pin and 12 pin, and between 3
12d : PCB MAIN-F4 pin and 12 pin of CN6 of the SL-Relay PCB.
(If shorted out, replace also the SL-Relay PCB.)
9
3. Check the connections between the SL-Relay PCB
and the Slider PCB and then disconnect and connect
the FFCs or the like.
6
4. Check short between 1 pin and 16 pin, and between 3
pin and 16 pin of CN1 of the Slider PCB.
(If shorted out, replace also the Slider PCB.)
10
SYSTEM HALT (*)
13e : PCB STATION-F1
Station PCB fuse (F1) disconnected. 1. Replace the Station III PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.4) 7
SYSTEM HALT (*) Station PCB fuse (F2) disconnected.
11
13f : PCB STATION-F2
SYSTEM HALT (*) Station PCB fuse (F3) disconnected.
12
140 : PCB STATION-F3
SYSTEM HALT (*)
147 : DS-IC BUSY
DALLAS IC BUSY error 1. Check connection of the ID Contact PCB connection
cable and damage of the cable. 8
2. Try to use a different cartridge.
13 3. Replace the ID Contact PCB Assy. with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.3)
(Refer to 3.3.2)
SYSTEM HALT (*) Slider PCB fuse (F1) disconnected 1. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one. (Refer to
14
159 : PCB SLDR-F1 6.4.5)

Rev.

SYSTEM HALT (*) No Station III PCB 1. Check the connections between the Station III PCB
15a : PCB STA3 and the Main PCB, and then disconnect and connect
the FFCs.
3. Replace the Station III PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.4)
4. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1) 1
SYSTEM HALT (*) 30pinFPC1 of Main PCB connect error 1. Check the connections between the SL-Relay PCB and
15a : MAIN FPC-1 the Main PCB, and then disconnect and connect the
FFCs.
2
(Refer to 3.3.2)
SYSTEM HALT (*) Main PCB fuse (F5) disconnected. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
17
160 : PCB MAIN-F5
SYSTEM HALT (*) Main PCB fuse (F6) disconnected. Before Main PCB replace, do the following checks.
3
161 : PCB MAIN-F6 1. Check the connections between the Station III PCB
and the Main PCB, and then disconnect and connect
the FFCs.
18 2. Check short between 1 pin and 4 pin of CN1, and
between 1 pin and 9 pin of CN11 of the Station III
PCB.
(If shorted out, replace also the Station III PCB.)
19
SYSTEM HALT (*)
11d : PCB SLRY-F1
SL-Relay PCB fuse (F1) disconnected. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2) 4
SYSTEM HALT (*) SL-Relay PCB fuse (F2) disconnected.
13c : PCB SLRY-F2 Before SL-Relay PCB replace, do the following checks.
1. Check the connections between the Slider PCB and the
SL-Relay PCB, and then disconnect and connect the
5
20 FFCs.
2. Check short between 1 pin and 4 pin of CN1, and
between 1 pin and 9 pin of CN11 of the Slider PCB.
(If shorted out, replace also the Slider PCB.)
SYSTEM HALT (*) SL-Relay PCB fuse (F3) disconnected. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
21
13d : PCB SLRY-F3 (Refer to 3.3.2)
SYSTEM HALT (*)
149 : PCB SLRY-F4
SL-Relay PCB fuse (F4) disconnected.
Before SL-Relay PCB replace, do the following checks.
1. Check the connections between the Pump III PCB and
6
the SL-Relay PCB, and then disconnect and connect
22 the FFCs.
2. Check short between 1 pin and 4 pin of CN1, and
between 1 pin and 9 pin of CN6 of the Pump III PCB.
23
SYSTEM HALT (*) Initialization error of the SL-Relay PCB
(If shorted out, replace also the Pump III PCB.)
1. Check the connections between the SL-Relay PCB and
7
10b : PCB SLRY-F3 (FPGA) the Main PCB, and then disconnect and connect the
SYSTEM HALT (*) No SL-Relay PCB. FFCs or the like.
11e : PCB SLRY-F4 2. Replace the FFCs of the above routes.
24 3. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
4. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1) 8

Rev.

SYSTEM HALT (*) No Slider PCB. 1. Check the connections between the SL-Relay PCB and
25 the Slider PCB, and then disconnect and connect the
11f : PCB SLIDER
SYSTEM HALT (*) Initialization error of the Slider PCB FFCs or the like.
10a : HDC INIT (FPGA) 2. Check the connections between the SL-Relay PCB and
the Main PCB, and then disconnect and connect the
1
FFCs or the like.
3. Replace the FFCs and the cabeles of the above routes.
26 4. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.5)
(Refer to 3.3.2)
2
SYSTEM HALT (*) LCD thermistor IC RW error 1. Check the connections between the Keyboard PCB and
120 : LCD THERM. the Main PCB, and then disconnect and connect the
FFCs.
2. Replace the FFCs and the cabeles of the above routes.
27
3
5. Replace the Power Supply PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.1)
SYSTEM HALT (*) No PRAM 1. Update F/W.
28
122 : PRAM NONE 2. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
SYSTEM HALT (*) PRAM data error
29
4
123 : PRAM DATA
SYSTEM HALT (*) PRAM address error
30
124 : PRAM ADDR
SYSTEM HALT (*) EEPROM read trouble 1. Update F/W.
31
125 : EEPROM READ 2. Upload the parameter and initialize parameter with
SYSTEM HALT (*) EEPROM write trouble #PARAMETER.
5
126 : EEPROM WR 3. Check the connection state between Main PCB ~ SL-
Relay PCB.
32
(Refer to 3.3.2)
SYSTEM HALT (*) Power OFF detection error (Not to OFF) 1. Check the connection state between sub-power SW and
127 : POWER OFF Power OFF process is conducted in the Keyboard PCB.
Power ON/OFF control without pushing
down the sub-power SW.
2. Check the connections between the Keyboard PCB and
the Main PCB, and then disconnect and connect the
FFCs.
6
3. Check the connector connection of Power Supply PCB.
4. Check if there is no error on the power path from the
AC Inlet.
7
33 ((Refer to 6.4.1) )
8. Replace the Station III PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.4)
8
(Refer to 3.3.2)
6.4.5)

Rev.

SYSTEM HALT (*) No Driver PCB of LED UV UNIT? 1. Check the connections between the Slider PCB and
170 : PCB UVLEDDRV the LED UV Unit, and then disconnect and connect
the cables.
2. Replace the FFC and the cabele located between the
1
34 3. Replace the cabele located between the Slider PCB
and the LED UV Unit.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
2
(Refer to 6.7.1)
SYSTEM HALT (*) Main PCB Ethernet IC trouble 1. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
35
303 : PCB MAIN ET
SYSTEM HALT (*) Wiper origin undetectable 1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST] ->
406 : WIPER ORG [WIPER-ORG]. (Confirm that the ON/OFF display is
switched by moving the wiper back and forth.)
2. Check that the wiper moves back and forth smoothly in
manual.
3. Check the assembly and connector connection of Wiper 3
Origin Sensor.
5. Check the connections between the Pump III PCB and
the SL-Relay PCB, and then disconnect and connect
36
4
the FFCs.
6. Replace the Wiper Back/Forth Origin Sensor with a
new one.
7. Replace the Wiper Motor with a new one.
8. Replace the FFC located between the Pump III PCB
and the SL-Relay PCB.
5
9. Replace the Pump III PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.6)
(Refer to 3.3.2)
SYSTEM HALT (*) DC motor is driving without excited 1. Update F/W.
40b : UN MAGNETIC 2. Upload the parameter and initialize parameter with
37
#PARAMETER.
SYSTEM HALT (*) Y Origin Sensor error

1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST] -> 6
502 : Y ORGIN [Y-ORG]. (Confirm that the ON/OFF display is
2. Check in manual if the carriage moves left and right
smoothly.
7
and then disconnect and connect the cabel.
4. Replace the Y Origin Sensor with a new one.
38 5. Check if there is no trouble on theY Motor Cable.
(disconnecting, burnout, or the like)
6. Replace the Y-axis motor with a new one.
8
(Refer to 6.3.2)
6.4.5)
(Refer to 3.3.2)

Rev.

SYSTEM HALT (*) HDC position counter error 1. [Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST] -
509 : HDC POSCNT >[Y-ORG].(Confirm that the ON/OFF display is
1
3. Check the assembly of Y-scale, and confirm that there
is neither dirt nor scratch.
and Linear Encoder.
39 6. Replace the Y-origin Sensor or Linear Encoder with a
2
new one.
axis Motor.
6.3.2)
6.4.5)
(Refer to 3.3.2)
3
SYSTEM HALT (*) X-origin error 1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST]->
510 : X ORGIN (Origin of X-axis can not be detected) [X-ORG].
2. Check the connection of connector of the X-origin
4
Sensor.
3. Replace the X-origin Sensor with a new one.
40
4. Check the assembly and connector connection of X-
axis Motor.。.
(Refer to 6.3.1 )
SYSTEM HALT (*)
511 : Z ORGIN
Z-origin error
(Origin of Z-axis can not be detected)
[TBL-ORG].
2. Check the connection of connector of the Z-origin
5
Sensor.
41 3. Replace the Z-origin Sensor with a new one.
4. Disconnect and connect the connector of the Z-
6
Motor(Stepping motor).
5. Replace the Station III PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.4 )
SYSTEM HALT (*) System error 1. Check the peripheral temperature of Main PCB, and
42
801 : (C)OPCODE (CPU exception: OP code error) then check if the error is caused by the thermo runaway
SYSTEM HALT (*) System error of CPU.
43 2. Make sure that there is no device generating strong
(CPU exception: Slot instruction error)
7
802 : (C)SLOT
radio wave in the vicinity.
SYSTEM HALT (*) System error
44 3. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
803 : (C)CPU ADDR (CPU exception: CPU address error)
SYSTEM HALT (*) System error (Refer to 6.4.1)
45
804 : (C)DMA ADDR (CPU exception: DMA address error)
SYSTEM HALT (*) System error
46
8
805 : (C)ZERO DIV (CPU exception: Division by 0)

Rev.

SYSTEM HALT (*) Connection check error of FPC cable between 1. Check whether FPC cable connection connector of the
47
11b : SLDR FPC L SL-Relay PCB and Slider PCB Slider PCB (CN2, 4, 6) and the SL-Relay PCB (CN3, 7, 8)
SYSTEM HALT (*) is proper.
11c : SLDR FPC H 2. Disconnect and connect the FFC and Twist pair Cable
located between the Slider PCB and the SL-Relay
PCB.
3. Disconnect and connect the FFC and Twist pair Cable 1
located between the Main PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
4. Replace the FFC(or Twist pair Cable) located
48 between the Slider PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
5. Replace the FFC(or Twist pair Cable) located between
2
the Main PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
6.4.5)
(Refer to 3.3.2)
3
SYSTEM HALT (*) FW error 1. Update F/W.
49
806 : FW/SIO bit (Serial control F/W error (bit control)) 2. Check and clear the parameter.
SYSTEM HALT (*) FW error 3. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
50 Main PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
807 : FW/SIO wbsy (Serial control F/W error (WR BUSY))
51 Main PCB and the Station III PCB.
808 : FW/STP-MTR (Step Motor stop waiting)
4
SL-Relay PCB and the Slider PCB.
52 809 : FW/XY param (XY-axis Motor resolution conversion
parameter error) 6. Replace the FFC located between the Main PCB and
the SL-Relay PCB.
SYSTEM HALT (*) FW error
53 7. Replace the FFC located between the Main PCB and
80a : FW/Y RANGE (Y movable range error) the Station III PCB.
SYSTEM HALT (*) FW error 8. Replace the FFC located between the SL-Relay PCB
54
5
80b : FW/ctrltsk (Motor control task error) and the Slider PCB.
SYSTEM HALT (*) FW error 9. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
55 80c : FW/PUMP W (Suction Pump stop waiting time over at
capping)
56
80d : FW/SERVO IT (Servo interruption error)
6
57
80e : FW/FROM prm (FROM PARAM error (F/W BUG))
58
80f : FW/SIO vch (Virtual serial CH setting error)
59
810 : FW/KEY RDI (No keyboard RDI)
60
SYSTEM HALT (*)
811 : FW/SIO read
FW error
(Serial control F/W error (RD BUSY)) 7
61
812 : FW/CRTRG NO (Cartridge number error)

Rev.

SYSTEM HALT (*) FW error 1. Update F/W.
62
813 : FW/WIPER RN (Wiper operation range error) 2. Check and clear the parameter.
63 Main PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
814 : FW/drivinfm (drivinfm() information obtaining error
1
64 Main PCB and the Station III PCB.
815 : FW/SIO rsrc (Serial control F/W error (material control))
65 SL-Relay PCB and the Slider PCB.
816 : FW/FROM WRC (FROM write control error)
6. Replace the FFC located between the Main PCB and
SYSTEM HALT (*) FW error the SL-Relay PCB.
66
817 : FW/SaveArea (Save area error (size over))
7. Replace the FFC located between the Main PCB and
2
SYSTEM HALT (*) FW error the Station III PCB.
67
818 : FW/EEP SIZE (EEPROM size over) 8. Replace the FFC located between the SL-Relay PCB
SYSTEM HALT (*) FW error and the Slider PCB.
68
819 : FW/HROM SIZ (HDROM size over) 9. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
69
81a : FW/FROM SIZ (FROM size over)
3
70
81b : FW/STACK OV (STACK OVER)
SYSTEM HALT (*) System error 1. Confirm the neighboring temperature of the Station III
000 : IOC1/ADC (STC3 A/D start error) PCB. In addition, confirm whether and it is an error by
the heat reckless driving of FPGA.
2. Confirm whether there is not a device generating
powerful electromagnetic waves to circumference.
71
6.4.5) 4
(Refer to 6.4.1)
SYSTEM HALT (*) System error 1. Confirm the neighboring temperature of the SL-Relay
000 : IOC2/ADC (SPC A/D start error) PCB. In addition, confirm whether and it is an error by
5
72
6.4.5)
6
(Refer to 6.4.1)
SYSTEM HALT (*) System error 1. Confirm the neighboring temperature of the Slider
000 : HDC/ADC (HDC A/D start error) PCB. In addition, confirm whether and it is an error by
73
3. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one. (Refer to 7
6.4.5)
(Refer to 6.4.1)
SYSTEM HALT (*)
74 000 : UNNOWN ERR
Unnown error 1. Update F/W.
2. Check and clear the parameter. 8

Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > Troubles Without Messages Dis-
Rev.
7.1.5 Troubles Without Messages Displayed 2.0
There is a possibility of electric shock.

Before working of the power supply and the surroundings, be sure to remove the power cable.
 List of the Troubles Without Messages Displayed
No. Case Cause List of Countermeasures 1

Start-up Fails at Power on Power path defective 1. Check the connection of cables.
2. Check the grounding of each electric equipment.
Main Power SW defective 1. Check the connection of Main Power SW.
2
2. Replace the Main Power SW with a new one.
1 Sub Power SW defective 1. Check the connection of Sub Power SW.
2. Replace the Sub Power SW with a new one.
Power Supply PCB defective Replace the Power Supply PCB with a new one.
Keyboard PCBdefective Replace the Keyboard PCB with a new one.
Main PCB defective Replace the Main PCB with a new one.
Something is displayed on
LCD, but the printer does not
start.
Abnormality of the wiring 1. Check the connection of cables.
2. Replace the FFC located between the Keyboard PCB and the 3
Main PCB.
Sub Power SW defective 1. Check the connection of Sub Power SW.
2
2. Replace the Sub Power SW with a new one.
4
Power Supply PCB defective Replace the Power Supply PCB with a new one.
Keyboard PCBdefective Replace the Keyboard PCB with a new one.
Main PCB defective Replace the Main PCB with a new one.
The UV lamp is not lighted. Abnormality of the wiring 1. Check connection between the Slider PCB and the UV unit.
2. Replace the cable located between the Slider PCB and the UV
3 unit.
5
UV unit defective Replace the UV unit with a new one.
Slider PCB defective Replace the Slider PCB with a new one.
Carriage hits a work and the Work Area Sensor defective 1. Readjust the Work Area Sensor.
table 2. Check the connection of Work Area Sensor.
6
4 Carriage height defective Readjust the height of the carriage.
Table defective 1. Check the Z-Origin sensor.
2. Replace the Z-Origin sensor with a new one.
3. Readjust the table.

Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions
7. Troubleshooting
7.1 7.2
7
Details on Errors and Malfunctions Detailed Methods of Coping with
the Malfunctions

Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions > Cannot start for “SYS-
Rev.
7.2.1 Cannot start for “SYSTEM HALT(1) 11c:SLDR PCB H” 2.0
 Outline
If the result of FFC connection check between the Slider Relay PCB and the Slider PCB is NG, the relevant error is
displayed and the startup operation stops.
It could be due to connection mistake of connector, FFC being inserted sidling, damage of FFC, etc., therefore, check
below.
 Confirmation item
1 Check whether there is connection mistake of connector on FFC between the Slider Relay PCB and the Slider PCB,
1
FFC being inserted sidling or forgetting to lock.
• Relationship between FFC connections
2
Slider PCB ↔ Slider Relay PCB
CN6 ↔ CN8
CN4 ↔ CN7
CN2 ↔ CN3
2 Check whether there is no damage on FFC between the Slider Relay PCB and the Slider PCB. If there is any dam-
age, replace it. 3
In addition, if there is any damage, check that the countermeasure of 6.1.3 “Tube_FFC Holder” Stick the Protec-
tion tape Stick the Protection tape has been taken.
As this countermeasure has not been taken during the production process for the machine whose serial No.
is J80xB275 and earlier, be sure to check this countermeasure on the machine earlier than the relevant No.
• For the method, refer to 6.1.3 “Tube_FFC Holder” Stick the Protection tape .
4
5
Example of damage of FPC cable
Coating had been damaged and short-
circuited with the metal part. (black
point within red circle)
7
3 Replace the Slider PCB or the Slider Relay PCB.

Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions > Discharging defect can-
Rev.
7.2.2 Discharging defect cannot be improved by cleaning. 2.0
 Outline
In some cases, the nozzle missing and deflection cannot be improved by cleaning. As its cause, there is a possibility
that dirt may adhere to the nozzle surface or ink may adhere to/fix to the nozzle surface due to mist. Also, foreign
substances may be clogged in the nozzle.
For the countermeasure, perform two works below:
Countermeasure 1: Clean the nozzle surface directly with a cleaning stick and cleaning liquid.
1
Countermeasure 2: If defect cannot be improved even if you performed "Countermeasure 1" above, perform pres-
sure filling of cleaning liquid.
Example of mist
2
adhering and fixing
Countermeasure 1
3
 Work procedure
<LOCAL>
2. Select menu of the “MAINTENANCE” of “FUNCTION”.
FUNCTION 3. Select menu of the “MENT :HEAD MENT” of “STATION”
4
MAINTENANCE <ent> from “MAINTENANCE”.
• The carriage moves to the center of the front edge.
MAINTENANCE
STATION <ent>
STATION
5
MENT :HEAD MENT
4. Open the Front cover TB.
7
Front cover TB
5. Clean the Nozzle surface.

• Immerse a cleaning swab in cleaning liquid and clean the
nozzle surface.
 Do not apply pressure on the nozzle surface.

Wipe lightly as if absorbing ink drops.
8
 Be careful about the light pointer so that cleaning
Nozzle surface
liquid may not adhere to it.
6. Close the Front cover TB and press [ENTER] key.
STATION
COMPLETED <ent>

Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions > Discharging defect can-
Rev.
Countermeasure 2
 Required items
1 Syringe kit for head washing (Type No. A103291)

Syringe kit for head washing
2 Tube kit (Type No. A103348)
3 Cleaning liquid bottle (Type No. A102452)
4 Stainless steel bat

1
5 Phillips screwdriver Tube kit
 Work procedure
2
<LOCAL>
2. Select menu of the “MAINTENANCE” of “FUNCTION”.
3
FUNCTION 3. Select menu of the “MENT :HEAD MENT” of “STATION”
MAINTENANCE <ent> from “MAINTENANCE”.
• The carriage moves to the center of the front edge.
MAINTENANCE
STATION <ent>
STATION
MENT :HEAD MENT 4
4. Open the Front cover TB.
Front cover 5. Remove the Front cover.
Front cover TB 6
6. Place a tray for cleaning liquid such as a stainless steel bat
under the head.
8
Stainless steel bat

Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions > Discharging defect cannot be improved by cleaning.
Rev.
7. Perform pressure filling of cleaning liquid from the air drain

port.
 For this work, the syringe is used, however, do not

pull out the piston when you connect with the air
drain port. It may absorb foreign object into the
nozzle and cause nozzle defect.
1
(1) Uncap the air drain port.
(2) Set the syringe kit with 10cc of cleaning liquid on the air
drain port.
(3) Fill 10cc taking time of 15 to 20 sec.
• At this time, check that cleaning liquid shower down from 2
the nozzle.
 While holding the filter with your hand to avoid
3
the filter from coming off due to the pressure of
the syringe, fill cleaning liquid.
(4) Remove the Syringe kit and cap the air drain port.
8. Press [ENTER] key.
4
STATION
COMPLETED <ent>
9. Perform [MAINTENANCE] - [FILL UP INK] - [air pg].

<LOCAL>
*To avoid cleaning liquid from mixing with ink.
FUNCTION
MAINTENANCE <ent> 5
MAINTENANCE
FILL UP INK <ent>
FILL UP INK
TYPE:air pg 6
10. Close the Front cover TB.
11. Attach the Front cover.
12. Perform test drawing to check that there is no blur. 7

*If there are any blur, perform cleaning.

Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Basic Operation
8. Operation Flow
8.1 8.2 8.3
8
Basic Operation Print Mode Service Mode

Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Basic Operation > Start
Rev.
8.1.1 Start 2.0
7,(UVCTVWR
8GT
2.'#5'9#+6
5'#4%*+0)14+)+0
(70%шщ
1
.1%#.

Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Print Mode
8. Operation Flow
8.1 8.2 8.3
8

Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Print Mode > LOCAL / REMOTE
Rev.
8.2.1 LOCAL / REMOTE 2.0
/2&$/!
(17(5 /2&$/!.&0<: &/ (17 8-)9 (17 /2&$/!

5(0$,1 05/,,,9
1
)81&7,21 )81&7,21
6(783(17!
'$7$&/($5 '$7$&/($5 (17 '$7$&/($5

(17!
7(67 7(67'5$: (17 7(67'5$:

6&$1',5(17!
7(67'5$: (17 7(67'5$:

)(('',5(17!
&/($1,1*
5(027(
&/($1,1*
0&<.:&/@
+($'>0
5(027(
(17 &/($1,1*
7<3(QQRUPDO
QRUPDOVRIWKDUG
RU 5(027(
(17 &/($1,1*

2
P IW
3
FUNCTION

Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Print Mode > FUNCTION
Rev.
8.2.2 FUNCTION 2.0
㻨㻸㻻㻯㻭㻸㻪
㻌㻌㻌㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺㻱㻺㼀㼃㻻㻾㻷㻌㻿㻱㼀

㼃㻻㻾㻷㻌㻿㻱㼀㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㻱㻺㼀㻪㻯㻻㻹㻼㻸㻱㼀㻱㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻦㼑㼚㼠
㻲㼁㻺㻯㻛䌻㻛䌼
㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺㻱㻺㼀㻴㻱㻭㻰㻌㻴㻱㻵㻳㻴㼀㻱㻺㼀㻴㻱㻭㻰㻌㻴㻱㻵㻳㻴㼀

㻴㻱㻭㻰㻌㻴㻱㻵㻳㻴㼀㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㻱㻺㼀㻪㻹㻱㻰㻵㻭㼀㻴㻵㻯㻷㻺㻱㻿㻿㻌㻦㻝㻝㻜㻚㻜㼙㼙
㻲㼁㻺㻯㻛䌻㻛䌼㻌㻌㻌䌻㻛䌼㻜㻚㻜䡚㻡㻜㻚㻜
㻴㻱㻭㻰㻌㻴㻱㻵㻳㻴㼀㻱㻺㼀㻴㻱㻭㻰㻌㻴㻱㻵㻳㻴㼀
1
㻴㻱㻭㻰㻌㻳㻭㻼㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㼑㼚㼠㻪㻴㻱㻭㻰㻌㻳㻭㻼㻌㻦㻝㻝㻚㻡㼙㼙
㻌㻌㻌䌻㻛䌼㻝㻚㻡䡚㻡㻚㻜

㼀㻭㻮㻸㻱㻌㻴㻱㻵㻳㻴㼀㻌㻌㻌㻨㼑㼚㼠㻪㼀㻮㻸㻌㻴㻳㻴㼀㻌㻦㻠
㻠㻥㻚㻜
㻜㼙㼙
㻌㻌㻌䌻㻛䌼㻜㻚㻜䡚㻡㻜㻚㻜

㻳㻭㻼㻌㻯㻴㻱㻯㻷㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㼑㼚㼠㻪㻹㻻㻰㻱㻌㻦㻻
㻻㻺
㻻㻺㻘㻻㻲㻲
㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺㻱㻺㼀㻻㻾㻵㻳㻵㻺㻱㻺㼀㻻㻾㻵㻳㻵㻺㻌㻌㻠㻞㻜㻌㻌㻹㻹

㻿㻱㼀㻌㻻㻾㻵㻳㻵㻺㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㻱㻺㼀㻪㻿㻱㻸㻱㻯㼀㻌㻦㼄
㼄㻌㻻㻲㻲㻿㻱㼀㼄㻌㻻㻲㻲㻿㻦㻌㻌㻌㻜
㻜㻌㻌㻹㻹
2
㻲㼁㻺㻯㻛䌻㻛䌼㻌㻌㻌䌻㻛䌼
㻻㻾㻵㻳㻵㻺㻱㻺㼀㻻㻾㻵㻳㻵㻺㻌㻌㻟㻜㻜㻌㻌㻹㻹

㻿㻱㻸㻱㻯㼀㻌㻦㼅
㼅㻌㻻㻲㻲㻿㻱㼀㼅㻌㻻㻲㻲㻿㻦㻌㻌㻌㻜
㻜㻌㻌㻹㻹
㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺㻱㻺㼀 SETUP

㻿㻱㼀㻌㼁㻼㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㻱㻺㼀㻪
㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺㻱㻺㼀 MAINTENANCE

㻹㻭㻵㻺㼀㻱㻺㻭㻺㻯㻱㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㻱㻺㼀㻪
3
㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺㻱㻺㼀 MACHINE SETUP
㻹㻭㻯㻴㻵㻺㻱㻌㻿㻱㼀㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㻱㻺㼀㻪
㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺㻱㻺㼀㻰㻵㻿㻼㻸㻭㼅

㻰㻵㻿㻼㻸㻭㼅㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㻱㻺㼀㻪㻱㼚㼓㼘㼕㼟㼔㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㼑㼚㼠㻪
㻌㻌㻌㻲㼁㻺㻯㻛䌻㻛䌼㻶㼍㼜㼍㼚㼑㼟㼑㻘㻱㼚㼓㼘㼕㼟㼔
㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺㻱㻺㼀
㻏㻭㻰㻶㼁㻿㼀㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㻱㻺㼀㻪
#ADJUST
4
㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺㻱㻺㼀 #TEST
㻏㼀㻱㻿㼀㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㻱㻺㼀㻪
㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺㻱㻺㼀 #PARAMETER

㻏㻼㻭㻾㻭㻹㻱㼀㻱㻾㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㻱㻺㼀㻪

Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Print Mode > SETUP
Rev.
8.2.3 SETUP 2.0
㩷㩷㩷䋾㪚㫆㫄㫇㫃㪼㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㪜㪥㪫㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧㪜㪥㪫㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧㪜㪥㪫㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪫㪜㪤㪧㪅㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫㪩㪦㪣㪫㪼㫄㫇㩷㩷㩷㩷㪧㪩㪠㪥㪫㪠㪥㪞㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪜㪥㪫㪕㪝㪜㪜㪛㩷㪚㪦㪤㪧㪅㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪧㪩㪠㪥㪫㩷㪪㪫㪘㪩㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫㪜㪥㪛㪘㪛㪡㪬㪪㪫㩷㪔㩷㩷㩷㩷㪇
㪇
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣㪄㪐㪐㪐㪐䌾㪐㪐㪐㪐
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧㪜㪥㪫㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧㪜㪥㪫㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧

㪧㪩㪠㪥㪫㩷㪤㪦㪛㪜㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪨㪬㪘㪣㪠㪫㪰㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪨㪬㪘㪣㪠㪫㪰㩷㪑㪪
㪪㪫㪘㪥㪛㪘㪩㪛
㩷㩷㩷㺢㪆㺣㪪㪫㪘㪥㪛㪘㪩㪛㪃㪝㪠㪥㪜㪃㪝㪘㪪㪫
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧㪜㪥㪫㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧

㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㪣㪦㪞㪠㪚㪘㪣㩷㪪㪜㪜㪢㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪣㪦㪞㪠㪚㪘㪣㩷㪪㪜㪜㪢㩷㪑㪦
㪦㪥
㪦㪥㪃㪦㪝㪝
1
㪠㪥㪢㩷㪣㪘㪰㪜㪩㪪㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪠㪥㪢㩷㪣㪘㪰㪜㪩㪪㩷㪑㪈
㪈
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣㪈䌾㪐

㪩㪜㪝㪩㪜㪪㪟㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪩㪜㪝㪩㪜㪪㪟㩷㪑㪣㪜㪭㪜㪣㪈㪈
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣㪇䌾㪊
㪮㪿㪼㫅㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫀㫅㪻㫀㫍㫀㪻㫌㪸㫃㫃㫐㪃㩷㫊㫌㪹㫊㪼㫈㫌㪼㫅㫋㫃㫐
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧㪜㪥㪫㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧㪜㪥㪫㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧㪜㪥㪫㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧㪜㪥㪫㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧㪜㪥㪫㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧㪜㪥㪫㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪧㪩㪠㪦㪩㪠㪫㪰㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪧㪩㪠㪦㪩㪠㪫㪰㩷㪑㪘
㪘㪣㪣㩷㪟㪦㪪㪫㪧㪩㪠㪥㪫㩷㪤㪦㪛㪜㩷㪑㪟㪟㪦㪪㪫㪝㪜㪜㪛㩷㪚㪦㪤㪧㪅㩷㪑㪧
㪧㪣㪦㪫㪠㪥㪢㩷㪣㪘㪰㪜㪩㪪㩷㪑㪟
㪟㪦㪪㪫㪣㪦㪞㪠㪚㪘㪣㩷㪪㪜㪜㪢㩷㪑㪟
㪟㪦㪪㪫㪩㪜㪝㪩㪜㪪㪟㩷㪑㪟
㪟㪦㪪㪫
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣㪘㪣㪣㩷㪟㪦㪪㪫㪃㪘㪣㪣㩷㪧㪣㪦㪫㪃㪠㪥㪛㪠㪭㪠㪛㪬㪘㪣㪟㪦㪪㪫㪃㪧㪣㪦㪫㪟㪦㪪㪫㪃㪧㪣㪦㪫㪟㪦㪪㪫㪃㪧㪣㪦㪫㪟㪦㪪㪫㪃㪧㪣㪦㪫㪟㪦㪪㪫㪃㪧㪣㪦㪫

㪬㪭㩷㪤㪦㪛㪜㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪬㪭㩷㪤㪦㪛㪜㩷㪑㪦
㪦㪥
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣㪦㪥㪃㪦㪝㪝㪃㪥㪦㪧㪩㪠㪥㪫
2
㪬㪭㩷㪘㪻㪻㪪㪺㪸㫅㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪬㪭㩷㪘㪻㪻㪪㪺㪸㫅㩷㪑㪈㪈
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣㪦㪝㪝㪃㪈䌾㪐

㪮㪦㪩㪢㩷㪚㪟㪘㪥㪞㪜㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪮㪦㪩㪢㩷㪚㪟㪘㪥㪞㪜㩷㪑㪦
㪦㪝㪝
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣㪦㪥㪃㪦㪝㪝
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧㪜㪥㪫㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧㪜㪥㪫㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧㪜㪥㪫㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧

㪚㪘㪩㪫㩷㪮㪜㪠㪞㪟㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜㩷㪑㪤
㪤㪮㪜㪠㪞㪟㪫㩷㪔㩷㩷㪏㪌㪇㪾㩷㪏㪌㪇㪾㪦㪢㪖㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪚
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣㪤㪃㪚㪃㪰㪃㪢㪃㪮㪃㪣㪊㪇㪇䌾㪈㪉㪇㪇

㪘㪬㪫㪦㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㪠㪥㪞㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪘㪬㪫㪦㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㩷㪑㪦
㪦㪥
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣㪦㪥㪃㪦㪝㪝
3
㪪㪜㪫㪬㪧㩷㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪠㪥㪠㪫㪠㪘㪣㪅㩷㪦㪢㪖㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋

Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Print Mode > MAINTENANCE
Rev.
8.2.4 MAINTENANCE 2.0
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㪜㪥㪫㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜㪜㪥㪫㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㪜㪥㪫㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥

㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪑㪚㪘㪩㪩㪠㪘㪞㪜㩷㪦㪬㪫㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㺢㪆㺣
㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㪜㪥㪫㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥

㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪑㪮㪠㪧㪜㪩㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㪠㪥㪞㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㺢㪆㺣

㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪑㪮㪠㪧㪜㪩㩷㪙㪦㪫㪫㪣㪜㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㺢㪆㺣
1
㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪑㪮㪘㪪㪫㪜㩷㪫㪘㪥㪢㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㺢㪆㺣

㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪑㪜㪯㪚㪟㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㺢㪆㺣

㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪑㪚㪟㪜㪚㪢㩷㪝㪠㪣㪫㪜㪩㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㺢㪆㺣
㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㪜㪥㪫㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㪜㪥㪫㪝㫀㫃㫃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫃㫀㫈㫌㫀㪻㪅㪜㪥㪫㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㪜㪥㪫㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㪫㫀㫄㪼㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㪠㪥㪞㩷㪘㪚㪫㪠㪭㪜
㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪑㪥㪦㪱㪱㪣㪜㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪲㪈㪈㪉㪊㪴㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋㪣㪜㪘㪭㪠㪥㪞㩷㩷㪑㩷㪈㪈㫄㫀㫅㪣㪜㪘㪭㪠㪥㪞㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪈㪉㪑㪊㪋㪁㪁㪁㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄
㺢㪆㺣䇭䇭䇭㪛㫀㫊㫇㫃㪸㫐㪼㪻㩷㪹㫐㩷㫋㫌㫉㫅㫊㪈䌾㪐㪐
㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㪜㪥㪫㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㪮㪠㪧㪜㪩㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㪠㪥㪞
2
㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪑㪛㪠㪪㪮㪘㪰㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪮㪠㪧㪜㪩㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㪠㪥㪞
㩷㩷㩷㺢㪆㺣
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
䇭䇭䇭㪛㫀㫊㫇㫃㪸㫐㪼㪻㩷㪹㫐㩷㫋㫌㫉㫅㫊
㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㪜㪥㪫㪝㫀㫃㫃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫃㫀㫈㫌㫀㪻㪅㪜㪥㪫㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㪜㪥㪫㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㪜㪥㪫㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㪠㪥㪞㩷㪘㪚㪫㪠㪭㪜㪜㪥㪫㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪑㪚㪬㪪㪫㪦㪛㪰㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋㪣㪜㪘㪭㪠㪥㪞㩷㩷㪑㩷㪈㪈㫄㫀㫅㪣㪜㪘㪭㪠㪥㪞㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪈㪉㪑㪊㪋㪁㪁㪁㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㺢㪆㺣㪈䌾㪐㪐
㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㪜㪥㪫㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟

㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪑㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪤㪜㪥㪫㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋㪜㪥㪛㪓㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪕㪚㪦㪥㪫㪠㪥㪬㪜
㪚㪦㪥㪫㪠㪥㪬㪜
㪮㪿㪼㫅㩷㫐㫆㫌㩷㪺㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼㪻㩷㫀㫋㪻㪼㫋㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㪜㪥㪛㩷㪻㪼㫋㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
3
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜㪜㪥㪫㪠㪥㪢㩷㪪㪜㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪲㪣㪟㪄㪈㪇㪇㪴㪜㪥㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㩷㩷㩷㪶㪶㪶㪶㪮㪚㪣㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞㪫㫀㫄㪼㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞㪜㪥㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㩷㩷㩷㪶㪶㪶㪶㪮㪚㪣㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞㪫㫀㫄㪼
㪚㪚
㪠㪥㪢㩷㪪㪜㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪪㪜㪣㪜㪚㪫㩷㪑㪤㪤㪚㪰㪢㪮㪣㪩㪜㪤㪦㪭㪜㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪲㪤㪤㪚㪰㪢㪮㪣㪴㪪㪜㪫㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞㩷㪣㪠㪨㪬㪠㪛㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣㪁㩷㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷㪪㪜㪫
㪁㩷㪫㪿㪼㩷㫀㫅㫂㩷㫊㪼㫋㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㫊㩷㪽㫆㫃㫃㫆㫎㫊㪻㪼㫋㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪚㪚㪚
㪣㪟㪄㪈㪇㪇㩷㪤㪚㪰㪢㪮㪣㪃㪤㪚㪰㪢㪮㪮㪃㪤㪚㪰㪢㪣㪣㪃㪤㪚㪰㪢㪶㪶㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㩷㩷㩷㪶㪶㪶㪶㪮㪚㪣㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞㪫㫀㫄㪼㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㩷㩷㩷㪶㪶㪶㪶㪮㪚㪣㪜㪥㪫
㪣㪝㪄㪉㪇㪇㩷㪤㪚㪰㪢㪮㪮㪃㪤㪚㪰㪢㪶㪶㪩㪜㪤㪦㪭㪜㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫㪪㪜㪫㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞㩷㪣㪠㪨㪬㪠㪛
㪻㪼㫋㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞㪫㫀㫄㪼㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㩷㩷㩷㪶㪶㪶㪶㪮㪚㪣㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞㪫㫀㫄㪼
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫㪩㪜㪤㪦㪭㪜㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪫㪬㪙㪜㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㪠㪥㪞㪜㪥㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪜㪥㪫

㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
4
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪠㫊㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪿㪼㪸㪻㩷㫎㪸㫊㪿㫀㫅㪾㩷㫅㪼㪺㪼㫊㫊㪸㫉㫐㪖
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜㪜㪥㪫㪠㪥㪫㪅㪮㪠㪧㪠㪥㪞㩷㩷㩷㩷㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㪜㪥㪫㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢㪫㫀㫄㪼㩷㩷㩷㩷㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷㪤㪚㪰㪢㪶㪶
㪠㪥㪫㪅㪮㪠㪧㪠㪥㪞㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪪㪚㪘㪥㩷㪚㪦㪬㪥㪫㩷㪔㩷㪌㪌㪇㪁㪁㪁㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪧㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷㪻㪼㪽㫃㪸㫋㪼㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋㪁㪁㪁㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪪㪜㪫㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣㪦㪝㪝㪃㪈䌾㪉㪌㪌
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜㪜㪥㪫㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢㪜㪥㪫㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢㪜㪥㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㪫㫀㫄㪼㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢㪜㪥㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧
5
㪚
㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪫㪰㪧㪜㩷㪑㪽㪽㫀㫃㫃㫌㫇㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪲㪤㪤㪚㪰㪢㪮㪣㪴㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪧㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷㪻㪼㪽㫃㪸㫋㪼㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣㺢㪆㺣㶎㪠㫋㩷㪻㪼㫇㪼㫅㪻㫊㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪠㫅㫂㩷㫊㪼㫋㪅
㪚㪚㪚
㪙㫌㫋㩷㩷㪮㪣㪃㩷㩷㪮㪮㪃㩷㪣㪣㩷㩷㪺㪿㫆㫀㪺㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪺㪸㫊㪼㩷㫆㪽㩷㫅㫆㫅㪄㪽㫀㫃㫃㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫋㪿㫀㫉㪻㩷㪿㪼㪸㪻㪅
㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢㪜㪥㪫㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢㪜㪥㪫㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢㪜㪥㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧
㪫㪰㪧㪜㩷㪑㪸㪸㫀㫉㩷㫇㪾㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪲㪤㪚㪰㪢㪮㪚㪣㪴㪧㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷㪻㪼㪽㫃㪸㫋㪼㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄
㺢㪆㺣㶎㪠㫋㩷㪻㪼㫇㪼㫅㪻㫊㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪠㫅㫂㩷㫊㪼㫋㪅
㪚㪚㪚
㪙㫌㫋㩷㩷㪮㪣㪃㩷㩷㪮㪮㪃㩷㪣㪣㩷㩷㪺㪿㫆㫀㪺㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪺㪸㫊㪼㩷㫆㪽㩷㫅㫆㫅㪄㪽㫀㫃㫃㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫋㪿㫀㫉㪻㩷㪿㪼㪸㪻㪅
㪻㪼㫋㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㪻㪼㫋㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢㪜㪥㪫㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢㪜㪥㪫㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷㩷㩷㩷㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㪫㫀㫄㪼㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷㩷㩷㩷㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㪫㫀㫄㪼
㪫㪰㪧㪜㩷㪑㪽㪽㫀㫉㫊㫋㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪲㪤㪚㪰㪢㪮㪚㪣㪴㪪㪜㪫㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㩷㪫㪦㪦㪣㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫㪩㪜㪤㪦㪭㪜㩷㪫㪦㪦㪣㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪚㪚㪚
㶎㪦㫅㫃㫐㩷㪸㫊㩷㪽㫆㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫋㪿㫀㫉㪻㩷㪿㪼㪸㪻㪃㩷㪮㪣㪃㩷㪮㪮㪃㩷㪣㪣㩷㩷㪺㪿㫆㫀㪺㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼
㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷㩷㩷㩷㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㪫㫀㫄㪼㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢㪜㪥㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪧㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷㪻㪼㪽㫃㪸㫋㪼㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜
㪬㪭㩷㪣㪘㪤㪧㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪜㪥㪫㪬㪭㩷㪣㪘㪤㪧
㪚㪟㪜㪚㪢㩷㪬㪭㩷㪣㪜㪭㪜㪣㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪬㪭㩷㪣㪘㪤㪧
㺢㪆㺣
㪣㪘㪤㪧㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜㪩㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪜㪥㪫㪚㪟㪜㪚㪢㩷㪬㪭㩷㪣㪜㪭㪜㪣
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪫㪟㪜㩷㪫㪦㪦㪣㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪧㪦㪠㪥㪫㩷㪑㪈㪈
㪈䌾㪋㪃㪘㪣㪣㩿㪃㪈㪄㪈㪃㪈㪄㪉㪃㪉㪄㪈㪃㪉㪄㪉㪃㪊㪄㪈㪃㪊㪄㪉㪃㪋㪄㪈㪃㪋㪄㪉㪀
㪜㪥㪫㪣㪘㪤㪧㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜㪩
㪬㪭㩷㪬㪪㪜㪛㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜㩷㪑㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪟
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
6
㪚㫆㫄㫇㫃㪼㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜㪜㪥㪫㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜㪜㪥㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞㪫㫀㫄㪼㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪜㪥㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞㪫㫀㫄㪼
㪚
㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪤㪚㪰㪢㪮㪣㪴
㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪲㪤㪩㪜㪤㪦㪭㪜㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫㪪㪜㪫㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㩷㪫㪦㪦㪣㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㶎㪚㫆㫇㪼㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㪸㫅㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷㪪㪜㪫
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪜㪥㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞㪫㫀㫄㪼㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪜㪥㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞㪫㫀㫄㪼

7
㪩㪜㪤㪦㪭㪜㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫㪪㪜㪫㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㩷㪫㪦㪦㪣㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪚㫆㫄㫇㫃㪼㫋㫀㫆㫅
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞㪫㫀㫄㪼㪫㪬㪙㪜㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㪠㪥㪞㪜㪥㪫㪮㪠㪧㪜㪩㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㪠㪥㪞
㪩㪜㪤㪦㪭㪜㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪻㪼㫋㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㪻㪼㫋㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜㪜㪥㪫㪮㪟㪠㪫㪜㩷㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪘㪠㪥㪜㪥㪫㪮㪟㪠㪫㪜㩷㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪘㪠㪥㩷㩷㩷㪜㪤㪠㪪㪪㪠㪦㪥㪫㫀㫄㪼㪮㪟㪠㪫㪜㩷㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪘㪠㪥㪝㪠㪣㪣㪠㪥㪞㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢
㪚
㪮㪟㪠㪫㪜㩷㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪘㪠㪥㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪲㪮㪣㪴㪩㪜㪤㪦㪭㪜㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫㪪㪜㪫㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜㪜㪥㪫㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪫㪜㪤㪧㪅㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫㪩㪦㪣 ᷷ᐲ 㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜

㪣㪠㪪㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㪧㪩㪠㪥㪫㪠㪥㪞
8
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜㪜㪥㪫㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜
㪮㪠㪧㪜㩷㪣㪜㪭㪜㪣㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪮㪠㪧㪜㩷㪣㪜㪭㪜㪣㩷㪑㪈㪈㪇㪆㪈㪇
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣㪈㪆㪈㪇䌾㪈㪇㪆㪈㪇
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜㪜㪥㪫㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜㪜㪥㪫㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜

㪠㪥㪝㪦㪩㪤㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪭㪜㪩㪪㪠㪦㪥㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪤㪘㪠㪥㩷㪭㪼㫉㩷㩷㪇㪅㪇㪇
㺢㪆㺣
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜㪜㪥㪫㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜

㪪㪜㪩㪠㪘㪣㩷㪥㫆㪅㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㩷㩷㪪㪆㪥㩷㩷㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇

Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Print Mode > MACHINE SETUP
Rev.
8.2.5 MACHINE SETUP 2.0
㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㫐㪼㪸㫉㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㫄㫆㫅㫋㪿㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㪻㪸㫐㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㪿㫆㫌㫉㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㫄㫀㫅㫌㫋㪼

㪝㪬㪥㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㪜㪥㪫㪤㪘㪚㪟㪠㪥㪜㩷㪪㪜㪫㪜㪥㪫㪪㪜㪫㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜㪜㪥㪫㪪㪜㪫㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜䋾䋼㪪㪜㪫㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜䋾䋼㪪㪜㪫㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜䋾䋼㪪㪜㪫㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜䋾䋼㪪㪜㪫㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜䋾䋼
㪤㪘㪚㪟㪠㪥㪜㩷㪪㪜㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪜㪥㪫㪕㪪㪜㪫㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪛㪘㪫㪜㪔㪉㪇㪇㪐㪅㪇㪈㪅㪇㪌㪛㪘㪫㪜㪔㪉㪇㪇㪇㪐㪅㪇㪈㪅㪇㪌㪛㪘㪫㪜㪔㪉㪇㪇㪐㪅㪇㪇㪈㪅㪇㪌㪛㪘㪫㪜㪔㪉㪇㪇㪐㪅㪇㪈㪅㪇㪇㪌㪫㪠㪤㪜㪔㩷㩷㪈㪈㪇㪑㪉㪇㪑㪇㪇㪫㪠㪤㪜㪔㩷㩷㪈㪇㪑㪉㪉㪇㪑㪇㪇
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣㺢䋯㺣䋾䋼㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪇㪇䌾㪐㪐㪇㪈䌾㪈㪉㪇㪈䌾㪊㪈㪇㪇䌾㪉㪊㪇㪇䌾㪌㪐
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜
㪫㪠㪤㪜㪔㩷㩷㪈㪇㪑㪉㪇㪑㪈㪇㪜㪥㪫
㪤㪘㪚㪟㪠㪥㪜㩷㪪㪜㪫㪜㪥㪫㪤㪘㪚㪟㪠㪥㪜㩷㪪㪜㪫

㪤㪤㪆㪠㪥㪚㪟㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪤㪤㪆㪠㪥㪚㪟㩷㪑㪤
㪤㪤
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣㪤㪤㪃㪠㪥㪚㪟
1
㪤㪘㪚㪟㪠㪥㪜㩷㪪㪜㪫㪜㪥㪫㪤㪘㪚㪟㪠㪥㪜㩷㪪㪜㪫㪜㪥㪫㪤㪘㪚㪟㪠㪥㪜㩷㪪㪜㪫
㪍㪇㪇㫄㫃㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜㩷㪑㪤
㪤㪚㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪜㪠㪞㪟㪫㩷㪔㪊㪊㪉㪍㪾
㪚
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣㪤㪃㪚㪃㪰㪃㪢㪃㪮㪃㪣㪉㪇㪇䌾㪌㪇㪇
㪤㪘㪚㪟㪠㪥㪜㩷㪪㪜㪫㪜㪥㪫㪤㪘㪚㪟㪠㪥㪜㩷㪪㪜㪫

㪢㪜㪰㩷㪙㪬㪱㪱㪜㪩㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕㪢㪜㪰㩷㪙㪬㪱㪱㪜㪩㩷㪑㪦
㪦㪥
㪦㪥㪃㪦㪝㪝

Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Service Mode
8. Operation Flow
8.1 8.2 8.3
8

Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Service Mode > #ADJUST
Rev.
8.3.1 #ADJUST 2.0
㧪 %QORNGVKQP
(70%6+10 '06 #&,756 '06 24+06#&,756 '06 24+06#&,756 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR 24+06#&,756
24+06#&,756 '06 24+06#&,756 '06
#&,756'06 24+06#&,756GPV 5'.'%65K&KT 5K&KT24+06 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0) '0& *#*$
*#*#

шщ 㨪㨪
24+06#&,756 '06 24+06#&,756 '06 24+06#&,756

(70%шщ
*#*$
*#*#
*#*$

㨪㨪㨪
㧪 %QORNGVKQP
24+06#&,756 '06 24+06#&,756 '06 24+06#&,756 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR 24+06#&,756
24+06#&,756
5'.'%6$K&KT ;&2+ $K&KT24+06 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0) '0& &2+$K&KT
1
㨪
#&,756 '06 *'#&#&,756 '06 5.#06#&,756 '06 5.#06#&,756 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR 5.#06#&,756
*'#&#&,756GPV 5.#06#&,756GPV /1&'PQTOCN 24+0656#46GPV 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0)
шщ PQTOCNHKPG 4'/
5.#06#&,756
1XGT.CR

㨪
*'#&#&,756 '06 215+6+10#&,756 '06 215+6+10#&,756 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR 215+6+10#&,756

215+6+10#&,756GPV 2#66'40RCVVGTP 24+0656#46GPV 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0)
(70%шщ RCVVGTPRCVVGTP *'#&#..*'#&*'#&
'06 4'2.#%'%1706 '06 4'2.#%'%1706 '06 4'2.#%'%1706 '06 4'2.#%'%1706 '06 4'2.#%'%1706 '06 4'2.#%'%1706 '06
2
#&,756
4'2.#%'%1706GPV %#464+&)'GPV %#464+&)' %#464+&)' %#464+&)' %#464+&)' %#464+&)'
шщ
4'2.#%'%1706 4'2.#%'%1706
5%#0%1706 %#464+&)'
шщ
4'2.#%'%1706
75'6+/'*
шщ
4'2.#%'%1706
9+2+0)%1706
шщ
3
4'2.#%'%1706 '06 4'2.#%'%1706 '06 4'2.#%'%1706 '06 4'2.#%'%1706 '06 4'2.#%'%1706 '06 4'2.#%'%1706 '06
5*16%1706GPV 0 0 0 0 0
(70%шщ шщ
4'2.#%'%1706 4'2.#%'%1706
&4#9.'0)6*O 0
шщ
4'2.#%'%1706
&4#9#4'#O
шщ
4'2.#%'%1706 '06 4'2.#%'%1706 '06 4'2.#%'%1706 '06 4'2.#%'%1706 '06 4'2.#%'%1706 '06 4'2.#%'%1706 '06
4
+0-2+%GPV %#464+&)' %#464+&)' %#464+&)' %#464+&)' %#464+&)'
4'2.#%'%1706
%#464+&)'
5
#&,756 '06 &'(#7.65'6 '06 &'(#7.65'6
&'(#7.65'6GPV 5;56'/RCTCOGPV +0+6+#.1-!GPV
шщ
&'(#7.65'6 '06 &'(#7.65'6

/#+06'RCTCOGPV +0+6+#.1-!GPV
шщ
&'(#7.65'6 '06 &'(#7.65'6

5'481RCTCOGPV +0+6+#.1-!GPV
шщ
&'(#7.65'6 '06 &'(#7.65'6
6
(''&RCTCOGPV +0+6+#.1-!GPV
шщ
&'(#7.65'6 '06 &'(#7.65'6

*'#&RCTCOGPV +0+6+#.1-!GPV
(70%шщ шщ
&'(#7.65'6 '06 &'(#7.65'6

+0-RCTCOGPV +0+6+#.1-!GPV
шщ
&'(#7.65'6 '06 &'(#7.65'6

+0-RCTCOGPV +0+6+#.1-!GPV
шщ
7
&'(#7.65'6 '06 &'(#7.65'6
5%#0RCTCOGPV +0+6+#.1-!GPV
шщ
&'(#7.65'6 '06 &'(#7.65'6

9#8'RCTCOGPV +0+6+#.1-!GPV
шщ
&'(#7.65'6 '06 &'(#7.65'6

шщ
&'(#7.65'6 '06 &'(#7.65'6

8
шщ
&'(#7.65'6 '06 &'(#7.65'6

шщ
&'(#7.65'6 '06 &'(#7.65'6

5*+22+0)UGVGPV +0+6+#.1-!GPV

Rev.
8.3.1 #ADJUST 2.0
#&,756 '06 %#22+0)

%#22+0)GPV %#2215

(70%шщ 㨪
#&,756 '06 #&,7569+2'4

#&,7569+2'4GPV 9+2'4215
(70%шщ 㨪
/QPKVQT /QPKVQT
#&,756 '06 9#5* '06 9#5* 9#5*+0) 6KOG 9#5* '06 9#5*+0) 6KOG 9#5*
%
*'#&9#5*GPV *'#&=/%;-9 .? 4'/18'%#464+&)' 2.'#5'9#+6 5'6%.'#0%#464+&)' 2.'#5'9#+6 4'/18'%#464+&)'
(70%шщ
1
/QPKVQT
9#5*+0) 6KOG 9#5* '06 9#5*+0) 6KOG 9#5* 9#5*+0) 6KOG 67$'%.'#0+0) '06
2.'#5'9#+6 5'6%.'#0%#464+&)' 2.'#5'9#+6 4'/18'%#464+&)' 2.'#5'9#+6 %1/2.'6'&GPV
/QPKVQT /QPKVQT
9+2'4%.'#0+0) '06 9#5* 㧪 9#5* 9#5*+0) 6KOG 9#5* 9#5*+0)
%1/2.'6'&GPV '0& %106+07' 5'664#05611. 2.'#5'9#+6 4'/18'611. 2.'#5'9#+6
/QPKVQT
#&,756 '06 67$'%.'#0+0) 67$'%.'#0+0)
67$'%.'#0+0)GPV 4'/18'%#464+&)' %1/2.'6'&GPV
(70%шщ
'06 *'#&+&*1FF '06 *'#&+&*'XGP '06 *'#&+&*1FF '06 *'#&+&*'XGP '06 *'#&+&*1FF '06 *'#&+&*'XGP
2
#&,756
*'#&+&GPV 8
1HHUGV 8
1HHUGV 8
1HHUGV 8
1HHUGV 8
1HHUGV 8
1HHUGV
(70%шщ 㨪㨪㨪㨪㨪㨪
#&,756 '06 4'5'65*16%17065 '06 1((5'681.6

%
4'5'65*16%065GPV *'#&=/%;-9 .? +0+6+#.1-!GPV
(70%шщ
#&,756 '06 *'#&81.6#&,756 %JGEM *'#&81.6#&,756 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR *'#&81.6#&,756

*'#&81.6#&,GPV 5'.'%6%*'%- 24+0656#46GPV 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0)
(70%шщ %*'%-#&,756
3
#FLWUV *'#&81.6#&,756 '06 *&1((5'6=?8 '06 *&1((5'6=?8 '06 *&1((5'6=?8 '06
5'.'%6*'XP
/ % UVCTV8 UVQR8 UVGR8
㧨⴫␜଀㧪*'XP
/*1FF
%*'XP
;*1FF
-*'XP
9*1FF
. 㨪㨪㨪
%QORNGVKQP
*'#&81.6#&,756 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR *'#&81.6#&,756 *&1((5'6=?8
24+0656#46GPV 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0) *'XP
/8
㨪
5
#&,756 '06 *'#&6'/2
*'#&6'/2GPV 6'/2㩩%
(70%шщ 㨪
#&,756 '06 ':%*#0)'.'&78 '06 ':%*#0)'.'&78 6KOG ':%*#0)'.'&78 '06 ':%*#0)'.'&78 '06 ':%*#0)'.'&78
':%*#0)'.'&78GPV 9#56'#(GPV 2.'#5'9#+6 4'#&;VQ':%*#0)' 4GUGVKTTVKOGGPV 2.'#5'219'41((
(70%шщ
#&,756 '06 78WPKV '06 78WPKV '06 78WPKV

78WPKVGPV 78WPKV 5%#0.'8'. 4'6740.'8'.
(70%шщ 㨪㨪㨪
#&,756 '06 1$5647%6+101((

5'05'1$564%60GPV
6
(70%шщ
#&,756 '06 5'4+#.01

5'4+#.0QGPV 50
(70%шщ 㨪 <
#&,756 '06 &'#.'401

&'#.'40QGPV &0
(70%шщ 㨪 <
‫ޓޓ‬шщ %QORNGVKQP
#&,756 '06 14+)+0#&,756 㧪 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR 14+)+0#&,756 14+)+0#&,756 '06 14+)+0#&,756
14+)+0#&,756GPV %.'#4 &4#9 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0) '0& :; :;
(70%шщ :㨪 ;㨪
#&,756 '06 6#$.'#&,756 '06 6#$.'#&,756
7
Thiscanbesetifthe
6#$.'#&,756GPV 5.+&'410 %1/2.'6'&GPV numberofpartition
(70%шщ 101((
passesisnotminimum.
#&,756 '06 5'637#.+6; '06 5'637#.+6; '06 5'637#.+6; '06 5'637#.+6;
5'637#.+6;GPV :&2+ 37#.+6;56#0&#4& 2#55RCUU *+)*52''&1((
(70%шщ 56#0&#4&(+0'(#56 101((
㧪 %QORNGVKQP
#&,756 '06 (''&%1/2 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR (''&%1/2 (''&%1/2
(''&%1/2GPV 24+0656#46GPV 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0) '0& #&,756

(70%шщ 㨪
#&,756 '06 9#5*67$' '06 5'69#5*611. '06 9#5*67$' '06 4'/18'9#5*611.

% %1/2.'6'GPV %1/2.'6'GPV %1/2.'6'GPV
9#5*67$'GPV *'#&=/%;-9 .?
(70%шщ
8
#&,756 '06 #0).'#&,756 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR #0).'#&,756
#0).'#&,756GPV 24+0656#46GPV 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0)
(70%шщ

Rev.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2013.02.08 F/W ver 3.50/3.50 Remark
8.3.1 #ADJUST 2.1
$'-867 (17 /$1 (17 /$1,3B$''5! 㸼 /$1,3B$''5! 㸼 /$1,3B$''5! 㸼 /$1,3B$''5!

/$1&21),*HQW! ,3$''5(66HQW '''''''''''' '''''''''''' '''''''''''' ''''''''''''
ҍҎ 㹼㹼㹼㹼
'HIDXOW*DWHZD\
/$1 (17 /$1'()*:! 㸼 /$1'()*:! 㸼 /$1'()*:! 㸼 /$1'()*:!
'()$8/7*$7(:$<HQW '''''''''''' '''''''''''' '''''''''''' ''''''''''''
)81&ҍҎ ҍҎ 㹼㹼㹼㹼
'16$GGUHVV
/$1 (17 /$1'16! 㸼 /$1'16! 㸼 /$1'16! 㸼 /$1'16!
'16$''5(66HQW '''''''''''' '''''''''''' '''''''''''' ''''''''''''
ҍҎ 㹼㹼㹼㹼
1
6XE1HW0DVN
/$1 (17 /$1
68%1(706.HQW 1(70$6.
ҍҎ 㹼
6073$GGUHVV
/$1 (17 /$16073!
6073$''5(66HQW ZL]WHFFRMS
ҍҎ

㹼
`
323$GGUHVV
/$1 (17 /$1323!
323$''5(66HQW ZL]WHFFRMS
ҍҎ

㹼
`
8VHU1DPH
/$1 (17 /$186(51$0(!
86(51$0(HQW PDLOWHVW
2
ҍҎ

㹼
`
6073EHIRUH323
/$1 (17 /$1
323EHIRUH6073HQW 323EHIRUH60732))
ҍҎ 212))
$323
/$1 (17 /$1
$323HQW $32321
212))
$'-867 (17 0$&+,1(1$0(

0$&+,1(1$0(HQW! 0DFKLQH1DPH
)81&ҍҎ $
3
$'-867 (17 3$&.,1*
3$&.,1*HQW! &203/(7('HQW

Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Service Mode > #TEST
Rev.
8.3.2 #TEST 2.0
(70%6+10 '06 6'56 '06 %*'%-2#66'40 '06 %*'%-2#66'40

6'56'06 %*'%-2#66'40GPV 2#66'40 :&2+
шщ Thisisnotdisplayerfor '06
feedevalutionpattern.
%*'%-2#66'40 '06 %*'%-2#66'40
2#66'40 ;&2+
шщ '06
%*'%-2#66'40 '06 %*'%-2#66'40 '06 %*'%-2#66'40 1PN[HQT8

2#66'40 2.165K&KTRCUU 9+&6*FQVU .+0'5.#06*.+0'CPF
1
)4+&
шщ : '06㨪
:
%*'%-2#66'40 '06 %*'%-2#66'40 1PN[HQT8.+0'5.#06
2#66'40 $'69''0FQVU CPF*.+0'
шщ '06㨪
%*'%-2#66'40 '06 %*'%-2#66'40 1PN[HQT)4+&

2#66'4001<<.' )4+&5+<'OO
шщ '06㨪
%*'%-2#66'40 '06 %*'%-2#66'40

2#66'408.+0' :;
шщ '06㨪
2
%*'%-2#66'40 '06 %*'%-2#66'40
2#66'40*.+0' :;
шщ '06㨪
%*'%-2#66'40 '06 %*'%-2#66'40 4'/ %*'%-2#66'40

2#66'405.#06 0Q\\NG=? 2#66'402.16
шщ 4'/
4'/ '06
'06
%*'%-2#66'40 '06 %*'%-2#66'40 *'#&6'/2%10641.

2#66'40)4#&#6' *+)*52''&1(( 2.'#5'9#+6
(70%шщ шщ 101(( 6GOR
%*'%-2#66'40 '06 Thiscanbesetifthenumber %*'%-2#66'40

2#66'408$9 ofpartitiompassesisnot 24+06+0)
3
шщ
%*'%-2#66'40 '06 %*'%-2#66'40

2#66'40*$9 24+06+0)
шщ
%*'%-2#66'40 '06
2#66'40(''&'8#.
шщ
%*'%-2#66'40 '06
2#66'40)4+&
шщ
%*'%-2#66'40 '06 %*'%-2#66'40 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR %*'%-2#66'40
4
2#6'40&412%*'%- 2#66'402.16 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0)
5
6'56 '06 2#4#/'6'4&4#9 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9
2#4#/'6'4&4#9GPV &4#95;56'/2#4#/ 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0)
шщ
2#4#/'6'4&4#9 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9

&4#9/#+06'2#4#/ 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0)
шщ
2#4#/'6'4&4#9 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9

&4#95'4812#4#/ 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0)
шщ
2#4#/'6'4&4#9 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9
6
&4#9(''&2#4#/ 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0)
шщ
2#4#/'6'4&4#9 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9

&4#9*'#&2#4#/ 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0)
(70%шщ шщ
2#4#/'6'4&4#9 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9

&4#9+0-2#4#/ 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0)
шщ
2#4#/'6'4&4#9 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9

&4#9+0-2#4#/ 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0)
шщ
7
2#4#/'6'4&4#9 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9
&4#95%#02#4#/ 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0)
шщ
2#4#/'6'4&4#9 '06 2#4#/'6'4&4#9 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9

&4#99#8'2#44/ %1.145.%6FTQR% 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0)
шщ FTQR%FTQR9FTQR%FTQR9FTQR%FTQR9
2#4#/'6'4&4#9 '06 2#4#/'6'4&4#9 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9

&4#99#8'2#4#/ %1.145.%6- 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0)
шщ -%/;9
2#4#/'6'4&4#9 '06 2#4#/'6'4&4#9 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9

&4#99#8'2#4#/ %1.145.%6- 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0)
8
шщ -%/;92
2#4#/'6'4&4#9 '06 2#4#/'6'4&4#9 '06 *'#&6'/2%10641. 6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9

&4#99#8'2#4#/ %1.145.%6- 2.'#5'9#+6 24+06+0)
-%/;9

Rev.
8.3.2 #TEST 2.0
6'56 '06 5'05146'56 щ 5'05146'56 щ 5'05146'56 щ 5'05146'56 щ 5'05146'56 щ 5'05146'56 щ

5'05146'56GPV %QXGT12'0 ;1TI10 :1TI10 <1TI10 9KRGT1TI1(( 9QTM*GKIJV10
(70%шщ 12'0%.15' 101(( 101(( 101(( 101(( 101((
5'05146'56 щ 5'05146'56 щ 5'05146'56 щ 5'05146'56 щ 5'05146'56 щ 5'05146'56 щ

+PM%VTI10 +PM%VTI10 +PM%VTI10 +PM%VTI10 +PM%VTI10 +PM%VTI10
101(( 101(( 101(( 101(( 101(( 101((
5'05146'56 щ 5'05146'56 щ 5'05146'56 щ 5'05146'56 щ 5'05146'56 щ 5'05146'56 щ

+PM0GCT1- +PM0GCT1- +PM0GCT1- +PM0GCT1- +PM0GCT1- +PM0GCT1-
1-0'0& 1-0'0& 1-0'0& 1-0'0& 1-0'0& 1-0'0&
1
5'05146'56
%QQN(NQCV10
101((
9JGPFCVCGTTQTQEEWTU 9JGPCFFTGUUGTTQTQEEWTU
6'56 '06 %*'%-/'/14; '06 %*'%-/'/14; %*'%-/'/14; %*'%-/'/14;
%*'%-/'/14;GPV %*'%-5&4#/ 5&4#/ 5&4#/&ZZZZZZZZ 5&4#/#ZZZZZZZZ
ш㧛щ
9JGPUWOGTTQTQEEWTU
%*'%-/'/14; '06 %*'%-/'/14; %*'%-/'/14;
%*'%-(41/ (41/ (41/57/'4414
(70%шщ ш㧛щ
9JGPFCVCGTTQTQEEWTU 9JGPCFFTGUUGTTQTQEEWTU
%*'%-/'/14; '06 %*'%-/'/14; %*'%-/'/14; %*'%-/'/14;
2
%*'%-54#/ 54#/ 54#/&ZZZZZZZZ 54#/#ZZZZZZZZ
6'56 '06 -';$1#4&6'56 -';$1#4&6'56 -';$1#4&6'56 -';$1#4&6'56 -';$1#4&6'56 -';$1#4&6'56

-';$1#4&6'56GPV -G[ 010' -G[ =(70%6+10? -G[ =4'/16'? -G[ ='06'4? -G[ =<72? -G[ =57$29459?
-';$1#4&6'56
-';$1#4& 6'56 -';$1#4&6'56
-';$1#4& 6'56 -';$1#4&6'56
-';$1#4& 6'56 -';$1#4&6'56
-';$1#4& 6'56 -';$1#4&6'56
-';$1#4& 6'56
-G[ =6'56&4#9? -G[ =%.'#0+0)? -G[ =&#6#%.'#4? ='0&? '0&6'56 -G[ =<&190?
(70%шщ
-';$1#4&6'56 -';$1#4&6'56 -';$1#4&6'56 -';$1#4&6'56
-G[ =72? -G[ =&190? -G[ =.'(6? -G[ =4+)*6?
6'56 '06

6'56.%&GPV
3
(70%шщ
5
6'56 '06 %*'%-6'/2 '06 %*'%-6'/2 '06 %*'%-6'/2 '06 %*'%-6'/2 '06 %*'%-6'/2 '06 %*'%-6'/2 '06
%*'%-6'/2GPV *65+0-㩩% щ *'#&㩩% щ *'#&㩩% щ *'#&㩩% щ *'#&㩩% щ *'#&㩩% щ
(70%шщ
%*'%-6'/2 '06 %*'%-6'/2 '06 %*'%-6'/2 '06 %*'%-6'/2 '06 %*'%-6'/2 '06 %*'%-6'/2 '06
*'#&㩩% щ *'#&㩩% щ *'#&㩩% щ .'&78㩩% щ .'&78㩩% щ .'&78㩩% щ
%*'%-6'/2 '06 %*'%-6'/2 '06 %*'%-6'/2 '06 %*'%-6'/2

4#&+#6'4㩩% щ *&$#5'㩩% щ *&$#5'㩩% щ .%&㩩%
9JGPGTTQTKUQEEWTU
6'56 '06 %*'%-+0-+% '06 %06 '0& %06
6
%*'%-+0-+%GPV AAAAAA +%'44
(70%ǔщ
4'64;
6'56 '06 %*'%-78.'8'. '06 %*'%-78.'8'. '06 %*'%-78.'8'. '06 %*'%-78.'8'. '06 %*'%-78.'8'.
%*'%-78.'8'.GPV 5'66*'611.GPV 78.'8'. 56#46%*'%-78GPV %*'%-+0) 4'64; '0&
(70%шщ
6'56 '06 #)'+0) '06 :;<5'481 '06 :;<5'481 '06 :;<5'481 '06 :;<5'481 '06 :;<5'481 '06
#)'+0)GPV :;<5'481GPV <725# <725# <&05# <&05# <
5㨪 #㨪 5㨪 #㨪㨪
:;<5'481 '06 :;<5'481 '06 :;<5'481 '06 :;<5'481 '06

ш㧛щ :5# :5# ;5# ;5#
7
5㨪 #㨪 5㨪 #㨪
:;<5'481 '06 :;<5'481 '06 :;<5'481

:; :; :;
VQ OCZKOWO XCNWG
VQOCZKOWOXCNWG VQ OCZKOWO XCNWG
VQOCZKOWOXCNWG
#)'+0) '06 :;5'481 '06 :;5'481 '06 :;5'481 '06 :;5'481 '06
:;5'481GPV :5# :5# ;5# ;5#
5㨪 #㨪 5㨪 #㨪
:;5'481 '06 :;5'481 '06 :;5'481

ш㧛щ :; :; :;
VQOCZKOWOXCNWG VQOCZKOWOXCNWG
#)'+0) '06 :5'481 '06 :5'481 '06 :5'481 '06 :5'481
8
:5'481GPV :5# :5# : :
ш㧛щ 5㨪 #㨪 VQOCZKOWOXCNWG
#)'+0) '06 ;5'481 '06 ;5'481 '06 ;5'481 '06 ;5'481

(70%шщ ;5'481GPV ;5# ;5# ; ;
ш㧛щ 5㨪 #㨪 VQOCZKOWOXCNWG
#)'+0) '06 27/2/1614 '06 27/2/1614 '06 27/2/1614 '06 27/2/1614 '06 27/2/1614 '06
27/2/1614GPV ;DCT215(4106 %#21(( 27/2=? 52''&
TRO #%%
TROU
ш㧛щ (41064'#4 101(( 㨪㨪
27/2/1614 '06 27/2/1614 '06 27/2/1614

':'%6+/'U 27/256#46GPV ':'%6+/'UU
U㨪F

Rev.
8.3.2 #TEST 2.0
#)'+0) '06 9+2'4/1614 '06 9+2'4/1614

9+2'4/1614GPV 64;6+/'5
4'/#+0
ш㧛щ 㨪
#)'+0) '06 <5'481 '06 <5'481 '06 <5'481 '06 <5'481 '06 <5'481
<5'481GPV <725# <725# <&05# <&05# <
ш㧛щ 5㨪 #㨪 5㨪 #㨪㨪
#)'+0) '06 9+2'*'#& '06 9+2'*'#&

9+2'*'#&GPV 64;6+/'5 4'/#+0
ш㧛щ 㨪
1
#)'+0) '06 %#22+0) '06 %#22+0) '06 %#22+0)
%#22+0)GPV 9CKVKPIVKOGU ':'%6+/'KPHKP
ш㧛щ 㨪 KPHKPUGEUGEOKPOKPOKPJTJTJTFC[
9JGP6'5624+06KU10
#)'+0) '06 %.'#0+0) '06 %.'#0+0) '06 %.'#0+0) '06 %.'#0+0) '06 %.'#0+0) '06
%
%.'#0+0)GPV *'#&=/%;-9 .? 6;2'PQTOCN 6'5624+061(( 2CWUGVKOGU 64;6+/'5

ш㧛щ PQTOCNUQHVJCTF 101(( 㨪㨪
#)'+0) '06 4#&+#61427/2 %.'#0+0)

4#&+#61427/2GPV 27/2.'8'. 4'/#+0
ш㧛щ 㨪
ш㧛щ 㨪㨪
2
#)'+0) '06 (.#5*+0) '06 (.#5*+0)UJQV '06 (.#5*+0) '06 (.#5*+0)
(.#5*+0)GPV &165+<'. 4'(4'5*.'8'. 64;6+/'5 4'/#+0
ш㧛щ 5/. .'8'.㨪.'8'. 㨪
#)'+0) '06 :OGCUWTG '06 :OGCUWTG '06 :OGCUWTG '06 :OGCUWTG '06 :OGCUWTG
:OGCUWTGGPV
: OGCUWTG GPV : 5
:5 #
#
:5
: 5
##
:UVGROO
: UVGR OO :YCKVU
: YCKV U 2OOOQXG
2OO OQXG
ш㧛щ 5㨪 #㨪㨪㨪U
6GUVQHTGEQIPK\GF2%$
#)'+0) '06 %1/ '06 %1/56#
%1/GPV &'8+%'5.%656#
56#56#5.4)5.&7-';$1#4&
5
6'56 '06 %*'%-'0%1&'4
%*'%-'0%1&'4GPV /ZZZZ'ZZZZ
(70%шщ
6'56 '06 0Q&&&&$**** (70 '8'06.1)

'8'06.1)GPV ****;;//&&JJOOUU % 54%*260:::::::
&6%
TGRTGUGPVCVKQP
'8'06.1) 656 '8'06
(70%шщ +0+6+#.1-!GPV TGUGTXGF
6'56 '06 %*'%-/'55#)' '06 '4414
6
%*'%-/'55#)'GPV 9#40+0)/'55#)'GPV %1//#0&
ш㧛щ
%*'%-/'55#)' '06 5;56'/*1.6

(70%шщ '4414/'55#)'GPV '70-190'44
6'56 '06 6'56*#4&9#4' '06 1WV2QTV '06 1WV2QTV '06 1WV2QTV

6'56*#4&9#4'GPV 5'.'%61WV2QTV 4GIZZZZZ DKV1(( DKV1((
1WV2QTV+P2QTV#&%&#%2ED.KUV 㨪 101((
+P2QTV '06 ZZZZZ

(70%шщ 4GIZZZZZ ****A::::
7
#&% '06 ZZZZZ
4GIZZZZZ
&#% '06 ZZZZZ &6% ZZZZZ

4GIZZZZZ
㨪
2ED.KUV
</%1-
6'56 '06 0'#4'0& '06 0'#4'0&

%
0'#4'0&GPV *'#&=/%;-9 .? GZGEWVKPI

Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Service Mode > #PARAMETER
Rev.
8.3.3 #PARAMETER 2.0
㪮㪿㪼㫅㩷㫋㪼㫉㫄㫀㫅㪸㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㪠㪥㪠㪫㪠㪘㪣㪔㪈
(70%6+10 '06 2#4#/'6'4 '06 5;56'/2#4#/'6'4 '06 5;56'/2#4#/'6'4 5;56'/2#4#/'6'4
2#4#/'6'4'06 5;56'/RCTCOGPV 4)4+2 +0+6+#.1-!GPV
(70%шщ
2#4#/'6'4 '06 /#+06'2#4#/'6'4 '06 /#+06'2#4#/'6'4 /#+06'2#4#/'6'4

/#+06'RCTCOGPV /'%#V[R +0+6+#.1-!GPV
(70%шщ
2#4#/'6'4 '06 5'4812#4#/'6'4 '06 5'4812#4#/'6'4 5'4812#4#/'6'4

5'481RCTCOGPV E%[ENG EE +0+6+#.1-!GPV
(70%шщ
2#4#/'6'4 '06 (''&2#4#/'6'4 '06 (''&2#4#/'6'4 (''&2#4#/'6'4
1
(''&RCTCOGPV 5[UVGO +0+6+#.1-!GPV
(70%шщ
2#4#/'6'4 '06 *'#&2#4#/'6'4 '06 *'#&2#4#/'6'4 *'#&2#4#/'6'4

*'#&RCTCOGPV *#$ +0+6+#.1-!GPV
(70%шщ
2#4#/'6'4 '06 +0-2#4#/'6'4 '06 +0-2#4#/'6'4 +0-2#4#/'6'4

+0-RCTCOGPV (KNN7R +0+6+#.1-!GPV
(70%шщ
2#4#/'6'4 '06 +0-2#4#/'6'4 '06 +0-2#4#/'6'4 +0-2#4#/'6'4

+0-RCTCOGPV %#26+/' +0+6+#.1-!GPV
(70%шщ
2#4#/'6'4 '06 &'$7)2#4#/'6'4 '06 &'$7)2#4#/'6'4 &'$7)2#4#/'6'4
2
&'$7)RCTCOGPV 25'2# +0+6+#.1-!GPV
(70%шщ
2#4#/'6'4 '06 5%#02#4#/'6'4 '06 5%#02#4#/'6'4 5%#02#4#/'6'4

5%#0RCTCOGPV *F0HTGS +0+6+#.1-!GPV
(70%шщ
2#4#/'6'4 '06 9#8'2#4#/ '06 9#8'2#4#/FTQR% '06 9#8'2#4#/FTQR% 9#8'2#4#/FTQR%

9#8'RCTCOGPV %1.145.%6
FTQR% 8AQHU +0+6+#.1-!GPV
(70%шщ FTQR%FTQR9FTQR%FTQR9
2#4#/'6'4 '06 9#8'2#4#/ '06 9#8'2#4#/- '06 9#8'2#4#/- 9#8'2#4#/-

9#8'RCTCOGPV %1.145.%6-
- 8AQHU +0+6+#.1-!GPV
(70%шщ -%/;9
3
2#4#/'6'4 '06 9#8'2#4#/ '06 9#8'2#4#/- '06 9#8'2#4#/- 9#8'2#4#/-
9#8'RCTCOGPV %1.145.%6-
- 8AQHU +0+6+#.1-!GPV
(70%шщ -%/;92
2#4#/'6'4 '06 9#8'2#4#/ '06 9#8'2#4#/- '06 9#8'2#4#/- 9#8'2#4#/-

9#8'RCTCOGPV %1.145.%6-
- 8AQHU +0+6+#.1-!GPV
-%/;9
㪹㫀㫋㩷㪼㫅㫋㫉㫐㩷㪹㫐㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘㪚㪣㪜㪘㪩㩷㫂㪼㫐
ZZZ2#4#/'6'4


D500552-23-18072013
IT
FW 3.5 / 3.5

Ujf3042 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ujf3042 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ujf3042 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Documents

Maintenance Manual Change Tracking

Date 2013.07.18 Manual Ver. 2.3 Remark

Date 2013.02.08 Manual Ver. 2.2 Remark

Date 2012.06.06 Manual Ver. 2.1 Remark

Date 2011.09.30 Manual Ver. 2.0 Remark

Date 2011.03.02 Manual Ver. 1.20 Remark

© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. Maintenance Manual Change Tracking P.1

Maintenance Manual Change Tracking

Date 2011.03.02 Manual Ver. 1.20 Remark

Date 2010.08.27 Manual Ver. 1.10 Remark

© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. Maintenance Manual Change Tracking P.2

Maintenance Manual Change Tracking

Date 2010.08.27 Manual Ver. 1.10 Remark

Date 2010.04.08 Manual Ver. 1.00 Remark

© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. Maintenance Manual Change Tracking P.3

Maintenance Manual Contents 2.2

1 Operating Principle 3.2 Driving Parts

1.1 Basic Operation 3.2.1 Replacement of Z-Driving Screw

© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. Maintenance Manual Contents R.2.2 P.1

Maintenance Manual Contents 2.2

5.1.4 PARAM. DRAW 6.5 Sensors

6 Disassembly and Reassembly

© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. Maintenance Manual Contents R.2.2 P.2

© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.

1.1.1 Sequence at POWER ON 2.0

 Sequence at turning on the power supply

No. Item Process content

© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. 1.1.1 R.2.0 P.1

1.1.2 Sequence at POWER OFF 2.0

 Sequence at turning OFF the power supply

No. Item Process content

© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. 1.1.2 R.2.0 P.1

1.1.3 Work Area Sensor 2.0

Sensor for receiving light Sensor for floodlighting

Basic head gap: 1.5mm Table

© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. 1.1.3 R.2.0 P.1

1.1.4 LED-UV UNIT 2.0

LEDUVx2 DRV PCB 3042 UVDRV Control

LEDUV Iirradiation Assy

Water cooling Dia-

 Operation principle of LED-UV unit

No. Item Process content

 Operation principle of water cooled system

No. Item Process content

© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. 1.1.4 R.2.0 P.1

1.1.5 600cc Cartridge 2.0

© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. 1.1.5 R.2.0 P.1

© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.

1.2.1 Carriage out 2.0

MAINTENANCE STATION STATION STATION

© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. 1.2.1 R.2.0 P.1

1.2.2 Wiper Cleaning 2.0

MAINTENANCE STATION STATION

© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD. 1.2.2 R.2.0 P.1

1.2.3 Wiper Bottle 2.0

MAINTENANCE STATION STATION